Home

ATPDraw - Electrical & Computer Engineering

1. 1024x768 The initialization file may contain one or more screen resolution sections to record the ATPDraw main window size and position Such sections are typically named 1024x768 1280x1024 and SO on Parameter Description Left Window left edge position Top Window upper edge position Width Window width Height Window height The default 1024x768 resolution section looks something like this Left 64 Top 48 Width 8 96 Height 672 Objects Parameter Description Toolbar Shows or hides the main window toolbar at program startup StatusBar Shows or hides the main window status bar at program startup CommentLine Shows or hides the comment line of circuit windows when opened Windows tate Specifies ATPDraw startup state Normal Maximized or Minimized All parameters accept the boolean type values On Off True False 1 and 0 Default settings Toolbar On StatusBar On Comment Line Off WindowState Normal ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 110 ATPDraw a for Windows version 1 0 5 Advanced Manual ATPDraw _ _ FO for Windows 1 0 ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 111 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Advanced Manual This chapter contains several examples of how to use ATPDraw on real engineering problems You will not be shown how to create these circuits but the circuit files EXA_ CIR are part of the ATPDraw distribution kit To load these example circuits into ATPDraw use
2. TfPlot on character plot of fitting as above TfDat on output of circuit parameters as function of frequency InEl Al Same NexM im on order increases regardless of improvements in fitting parameters as 2c is Different fitting normally blank Normax lt 0 AminAl Data points with magnitude less than AminAl will be ignored during the fitting process Default value 0 05 Line data data tab Ph Circuit number aE ase Ground Bundles Cond pr Bal Bundles Cond pr Bal Zz Circuit Phase Rout m Rin m SEP m Rout m Rin m SEP m pe jp ik Rhofohm mu Rhofohm mu o _ tow m Vmid m Horiz m _ tow m Vmid m Horiz m aH Fil 9 Fig 6 22 Line data specification card number Select actual circuit number Change the maximum number on the Cable type tab Bundles Number of phase bundles in current circuit Cond Rout Rin SEP Rho mu Vtow Vmid Horiz Ground The position grid at the bottom changes size pr Bdl Number of phase conductors per bundle 0 handled 1 outer radius of phase conductor inner radius of phase conductor Solid conductor Rin 0 distance between phase conductors in a bundle O handled as blank resistivity of phase conductors relative permeability of phase conductors height of phase bundle at tower height of phase bundle at mid span u 27 3 Vmid 1 3 Vcow ised im calculations horizontal position to user selectable re
3. 36 1 46 BLANK CARD ENDING CONDUCTOR CARDS 100 100000 1 BLANK CARD ENDING FREQUENCY CARDS BLANK CARD ENDING LINE CONSTANT BEGIN NEW DATA CASE BLANK CARD 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Fig 6 7 Edit ATP file using the Notepad editor Normally you do not need to use this option because the ATP_LCC generates a correct ATP file However not all the ATP options are supported by the graphical preprocessor 1 e BRANCH request cards are not written to the ATP file so this Edit data case option is offered for experienced users to edit the file manually 6 8 The Help menu At present no extensive online help is available in the ATP_LCC A short description for the input parameters is available however selecting the Help buttons at the lower right corner in the Line data and Cable data windows 6 8 1 About This selection displays an information window about the program developer the sponsoring institution as well as the version of the program an ATP LinefCable Constants ba ATP_LCC version 1 0 1997 A Bonneville Power Administration product Programmed by EFI 7034 Trondheim Norway Fig 6 8 ATP_LCC s about box ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 173 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Line Cable Manual 6 9 The Line data window Starting from the electrical and geometrical data the LINE CONSTANTS supporting routine of ATP calculates the electrical characteristics for overhead lines The input data for this routin
4. Comment ser specified W Send parameters laclude AW USP YAYOC_6 LIB Browse M Old 3 j r 3 phase ORK Cancel Help Fig 5 16 Input window of the users specified 6 pulse rectifier bridge ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 128 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Advanced Manual The ATP file created by ATPDraw is shown here BEGIN NEW DATA CASE C Generated by ATPDRAW Tue 30 Jun 1998 C A Bonneville Power Administration program C Programmed by H K H idalen at EFI NORWAY 1994 1997 SPREFIX C ATPDRAW USP SSUFFIX LIB SDUMMY XYZ000 C Miscellaneous Data Card POWER FREQUENCY 60 C dT gt lt Tmax gt lt Xopt gt lt Copt gt 00002 033 500 1 1 1 0 0 al 0 TACS HYBRID 1 2 3 4 z 6 7 8 C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890 BRANCH G lt i lex n g2e lt retle lt rerz gt lt R o lt L 2C gt C lt m 1o lt m A gt sref I lt ref gt lt R KKA 2x B Sclieng gt lt 2 lt 20 TRANSFORMER TX00011 0E12 1 9199 IVA sl Ahsa Ls 2VS1MA XX0017 S022 214 59 AOE TRANSFORMER TX0001 TX0002 1VB ZAVSIMB XX00L7 TRANSFORMER TX0001 TX0003 IVC ZAVSLMC XX00L VSIMA VS1XXA 0001 1 VSIMB VS1XXB 0001 1 VBLMC VS51XXC 0001 1 XX0017 1 008 7 0 VSA VA 0001 1 VSB VB 0001 1 VSC VC 0001 1 TRANSFORMER TXO00041 0E12 1 J339 IVA VC so oO ad as 2VS2MA XX0032 HZ Zit ee Oe TRANSFORMER TX0004 TX0005 1 VB VA Z2VS2MB XX0032 TRANSFORMER TX
5. ORY Click on the white space with the left mouse button to place the inductor the enclosing rectangle disappears A grid snap facility helps you to place the inductor in the correct position The component position is rounded to the Fig 3 6 nearest 10 pixel The inductor in Fig 3 6 should be placed so that the node of the inductor touches the source Objects having overlapping node dots will automatically be connected The next figure shows a situation where the inductor component has been misplaced In this situation the objects are disconnected To correct this a connection could be drawn between the objects as will be explained later In this example you are supposed to place the inductor so that its left node overlaps the AC source node To move the inductor follow the instructions given in Fig 3 7 HAH oe Fig 3 7 Error Click on the object with the left mouse button hold down and drag it to the proper position then click on white space If you have placed the inductor in the correct position you can select the damping resistance After you have clicked in the Resistor field of the component selection menu a resistor icon appears in the circuit window enclosed by a rectangle Click on it with the left mouse button hold down and drag it to a position shown in Fig 3 8 Click on open space with the left mouse button to place it at the position shown in Fig 3 8 This resistor is supposed to be parallel with the inductor an
6. 67 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Reference Manual Each library file specification is verified to meet these requirements If the path of a library file specifies a different folder or the extension is not LIB an error dialog is displayed during ATP file generation enabling you to correct the erroneous specification by stripping off path and extension continue the operation using an unresolvable ATP include reference or cancel the entire ATP file generating process File format Power frequency The file is written with High resolution Sorting by cards POWER FREQUENCY request word The value of the system frequency can be set when the option is selected Sorting by group number Frequency scan Data file written with request Sorting by xpos M Auto path i Power Frequency f fso M Frequency Scan min 5 0E 0000 max 5 0E 0005 df 0 0E 0000 NPD 5 word for frequency domain Simulation min starting frequency of the Simulation max final frequency point df frequency step if NPD 0 linear scale is used NPD request for logarithmic scaling with the given number of points per decade gees TACS Will force the TACS HYBRID harmi and BLANK TACS cards to be M Comments written to the ATP file Comments Circuit comments are written Fig 4 18 File format settings to the ATP file 4 2 4 5 Edit batch jobs in version 1 2 and above This feature makes possible to execute your own exte
7. ATP Draw version 1 for Windows 170 ATPDraw for Windows DRAW version 1 0 Line Cable Manual 6 5 5 Save AS If the actual line constant or cable constant case still does not have a name noname can be seen in the header field it will be requested in a Save As dialog box Here the user must specify a file name for the current data case This command allows you to save the current case under a name other than that is already used 6 5 6 Close The current line or cable constant case will be closed The user will not be warned 1f the current case has not been saved yet but the last session can be retrieved by clicking the Edit toolbar icon or by using the Edit data command in the Edit menu 6 5 7 Exit This command closes the ATP_LCC program If any changes to the current session have not been saved yet the user will be requested as shown in Fig 6 4 to confirm before the application is terminated Q save changes to C ATP_LCC TEST_LIN Fig 6 4 Warning message before terminating the program 6 6 The Edit menu The Edit pop up menu is shown in Fig 6 5 Edit data Zoom fit Copy graphics Fig 6 5 Edit menu commands 6 6 1 Edit data This command displays either the Line or a Cable data window where the line model constant parameter frequency dependent etc the conductor geometry and the electrical data can be specified This command is also available via the toolbar icon al All input data of t
8. RLC BRANCH Resistance in branch in ohm Inductance in mH if Xopt 0 Inductance in Ohm 1f Aopt power frequency Capacitance in uF if Copt 0 Capacitance in uMho if Copt power frequency Ssopt and Copt 1S set in menu ATP Sim settings start node of RLC branch End node of RLC branch Fig 4 41 b Help information associated with the RLC branches On the Attributes tab of the Component dialog box the users can specify component data parameters and node names in the top left and top right tables respectively Many data parameters have a legal range specified To see what is the legal range of a parameter value place the input caret in the data field and press the Ctrl F1 keys Illegal values are issuing an error message when you move the caret to another data field change the active page or select the OK button All components have a group number serving as an optional sorting criterion for the ATP file the components with the lowest group number are written first You can specify the group number in the Group No field Component label and comment are set in the Label and Comment fields The visibility of the component label is controlled by the Labels option in the View Options menu The Hide and Lock buttons are common to all components Hidden components are not included in the ATP file and are displayed as light gray icons The Lock option is not implemented in this version but is provided h
9. TX0004 v CR30B TX0005 v CR20B IX0006 i CRZ2B IX0007 v CR30C IX0008 v CR20C IX0009 i CRZ2C OUTPUT GIPA 4 GAPB GAPC SINCLUDE C ATPDRAW MOD FLASH_1 MOD USE FLASH 1 AS FLASH_1A Hea ooo ms a ga N Z N Z N N N N ATP Draw version 1 for Windows 147 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Advanced Manual INPUT Vl IX0001 V2 IX0002 iczn IX0003 DATA Pset 1 000E 0000 Eset 9 000E 0000 fdel 4 000E 0000 fdur 2 000E 0001 OUTPUT GAPA trip ENDUSE USE FLASH_1 AS FALSH_1B INPUT Vl IX0004 V2 IX0005 iczn IX0006 DATA Pset 1 000E 0000 Eset 9 000E 0000 fdel 4 000E 0000 fdur 2 000E 0001 OUTPUT GAPB trip ENDUSE USE FLASH 1 AS FLAS_1C INPUT Vl IX0007 V2 IX0008 iczn IX0009 DATA Pset 1 000E 0000 Eset 9 000E 0000 fdel 4 000E 0000 fdur 2 000E 0001 OUTPUT GAPC trip ENDUSE RECORD FLASH la vcap AS FLASH la iczn AS FLASH la power AS FLASH la energy AS FLASH la trip AS ENDMODE C LS 1 VCAPA IZNA PZNA EZNA GAPA 3 5 6 J 8 C 34567890123456 7090123456 890123456 890123456 890123456 89012345678901234567690 BRANCH C lt n 1 gt lt n 2 gt lt refl gt lt ref2 gt lt R C lt n 1 gt lt n 2 gt lt refl gt lt ref2 gt lt R 51SRC1A 52SRC1B 52SRCUC 51SRC1A 52SRC1B 52CRCLC 51CR50A 52CR50B 53CR50C CR30A CR30B CR30C CRZ2A CRZ2B CRZ2C BRANCH 92X0017AX0068A RAVBA RAVBB RAVBC RAVBA RAVBB RAVBC CR30A CR30B CR3
10. 8B Ta xo0et T Ground M Display Fig 3 35 Click right button on single phase right node of the resistor No name is specified by the user for the node in Fig 3 35 ATPDraw thus gives the node a name starting with XX followed by a unique number This node is a single phase node with no phase sequence 3 phase nodes with no user specified names are given a name starting with X followed by a four digit number and ending with the phase sequence letters A B and C Some special restrictions apply to the splitter object found under Probes amp 3 phase in the component selection menu ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 49 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Introductory Manual e Connecting splitter objects together directly on the 3 phase side is illegal e Itis not permitted to connect splitters together with connections on the single phase side e If the name NODEA is given to what you know is phase A on the single phase side ATPDraw does not accept this and adds its own A at the end creating the node name NODEAA The general rule is that ATPDraw takes care of the phase sequence alone e The best solution is to specify a node name on the 3 phase side only The ATP data file of the circuit created by ATPDraw from Fig 3 32 b is shown below BEGIN NEW DATA CASE 6 O 7 0001 Ts LU T 1 10 L L LOY La ala as L t LUY gt lt TSTART gt lt TSTOP 8 C EEAS B A
11. ATPDraw for Windows 3 1x 95 NT version 1 0 User s Manual Laszlo Prikler Hans Kr Hoidalen The contents of this electronic document is identical with the SINTEF Report No TR A4790 but it is not an official document of the SINTEF Energy Research Norway It has been converted to PDF format and made available for distribution via the ATP FTP servers and Web sites as well as via the regional EMTP ATP Users Groups ATPDraw users can download and use this electronic manual free of charge Conversion to other formats and distribution on any kind of media requires explicit permission from the authors Release No 1 0 1 November 1998 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Trondheim Norway 15 October 1998 PREFACE ATPDraw is a graphical preprocessor to ATP 3 This report TR A4790 contains a complete description of the program ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 and replaces the manual for the DOS version 1 Data files for old versions of ATPDraw can be converted to the new format as explained in chapter 2 7 A preprocessor called ATP_LCC EXE for ATP s Line amp Cable Constants is described in chapter 6 New users of ATPDraw are recommended to focus on chapter 2 Installation Manual and chapter 3 Introductory Manual ATPDraw is developed by EFI which now has changed name to SINTEF Energy Research SEfAS Program development and writing of this manual have been financed by Bonneville Power Administration USA This
12. Induction machine TACS ATP Draw version 1 for Windows 116 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Advanced Manual PULS He SPUL WOELTA DD a a P AMPL Oy ACC ell wall D ma E5 SS alir aii ait SIGAW O SIGG AE ND VNU i y E gt BUS BUSMG ivy BUSMS Fig 5 4 6 ATPDraw scheme of the induction machine example EXA_4 CIR The TACS part of the circuit controls three sources creating a pulse width modulated armature voltage The TACS objects are listed in the reference part of this manual The input window of the TACS object at the end of the TACS chain is shown in Fig 5 5 This TACS object creates the armature voltage in phase A of the 3 phase node V TACS FORTRANT Attributes MODE PHASE NAME OUT 1 vA Group Mo fol Label Comment FORTRAN Hide OUT jf OSslG4 1 0 vD fe 0 M Lock OF Cancel Help Fig 5 5 TACS Fortran input window In the TACS statement the user must type in the expression s Only single phase TACS Fortran objects are supported The two blue info arrows into this TACS object serve as visualization of the SIGA from node SIGA and VD signals ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 117 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Advanced Manual The induction machine was given the data shown in Fig 5 6 Component IM_3MI Ed Attributes INF COMP 0 MPFAIR EPSOM 0 1565 FREQ BO OMEGA 162 840692 LMUD 0 016 JSATO 0 Group Mo fol L
13. To place a connection click on the left mouse button again Click on the right button or press Esc to cancel the connection operation The connection drawn in Fig 3 19 picks up intermediate nodes so all the five nodes will be connected together In this way ATPDraw suits the requirement What you see is what you get and the amount of required connections are significantly reduced RLE RLE RLC RLE Fig 3 19 Click left button Release move then click left button to place the connection If you made a mistake in the connection drawing process you can correct the error easily because connections are editable copy move rotate as any other objects If you would like to correct modify a misplaced connection click on it with the left mouse button After this selection the connection is enclosed by a rectangle and two squares replace node dots at the end of the line To move the connection click on an internal point of it using the left mouse button then hold down and move and release the mouse at the correct position To reposition a connection click on the node squares with the left button and stretch the connection as illustrated in Fig 3 20 ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 41 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Introductory Manual Fig 3 20 Edit connection Click any point of the line then click node squares and stretch 3 7 1 4 Load The last part of this example circuit is the load consisting of a
14. Fig 5 2 Three phase source input window Line switch The pi equivalent line is connected to the source with a three phase switch having independent closing and opening times in all phases The switches are initially open and close at Phase A 33 33 ms Phase B 36 10 ms Phase C 38 80 ms Capacitor bank The capacitor bank is 2 51 uF in all phases The switches connecting the bank to the network is initially open and close at Phase A 133 33 ms Phase B 136 10 ms Phase C 138 80 ms Pi equivalent line The data for the II equivalent line are calculated by the LINE CONSTANTS supporting routine of ATP The line is a 500 kV overhead line with 3 phase conductors and 2 ground wires taken from benchmark DCN3 DAT This calculation has resulted in the following line matrices for the 138 miles line only lower triangle part is given Read the inductances in mH the resistances in Q and the capacitances in uF R OT PT 851 06 317 37 2 3224 s le IQ a SSS L _ 4 l l l l l 773 84 755 62 111 6 322 66 20 3637 2 3684 i BAAT i i l l l l l l 818 41 773 84 851 06 101 83 111 6 313 37 0 2726 0 3637 23224A ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 114 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Advanced Manual If you click on the J line object with the right mouse button drawn on the rightmost side of Fig 5 1 b an object input window appears where the RLC data can be set ma
15. In the help editor the user can write his optional help file for the objects Available functions and menu field items of the Help Editor are described in the 4 2 6 2 section of this manual When the user completed all modifications on the component data and on the icon and help files the new support file can be saved to disk using Save existing support file will be overwritten or Save As new file will be created buttons ATPDraw performs data input checking before saving the modified file to disk In case of mistake an Error dialog box such as on Fig 4 24 appears ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 1 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Reference Manual x Phase value out of range 1 3 Fig 4 24 Error dialog 4 2 5 3 New User Specified The user can also create new user specified objects which can be used in ATP thanks to Include and Data Base Modularization This menu item enables you to customize data and node values icon and help text of a user specified component Selecting this field will first display the object size window shown in Fig 4 25 The Number of data is specified in the range 0 to 32 and eee eee p OK the Number of nodes in the range 0 to 12 Number of nodes 2 Help Fig 4 25 Specify size of object When the user determined the size of the new object based on the Data Base Module DBM file header and clicks OK a notebook style dialog box as the one shown in Fig 4 21 appears On the
16. InElim on order increases regardless of improvements in fae Same parameters as Zc NexMis Different fitting normally blank Normax lt 0 AminAl Data points with magnitude less than AminAl will be ignored during the fitting process 6 9 4 Matrix output of the line parameters Shunt admittance and series impedance matrixes will be calculated at a given frequency Rho Frega Line Model Single freq output M Metric units M High accuracy FCAR Rho ohmm Freq Hz 100090 M Seg ground M Full M Full Fig 6 15 Settings for shunt and series matrix requests The ground resistivity in ohm of the homogenous earth Frequency at which the per unit series impedance and the shunt capacitance matrices are calculated Metric English Switching between the Metric and English unit High accuracy FCAR If button is checked highest accuracy is used in Carson s formulas Seg ground Segmented ground wires If button is unchecked then the Cap ground wires are assumed to be continuously grounded Specifies selection between the capacitance matrix C and the susceptance matrix QC C72 Sym If selected shunt capacitance and or series impedance matrix for the symmetrical components of the equivalent phase conductor system will be calculated C Z Red If selected shunt capacitance and or series impedance matrix for the equivalent phase conductor system after elimination of ground wires and the bundling of
17. XFORMER and BCTRAN e Saturation and hysteresis curve conversion e Data Base Modularization ATP is available for most Intel based PC platforms under DOS Windows 3 x 95 NT OS 2 Linux and for other computers too e g Digital Unix and VMS Apple Mac s etc The program is in principle royalty free but requires a license agreement signed by the requester and the Canadian American EMTP Users Group or the authorized regional users group representatives The last chapter of the Installation Manual gives more information about the regional ATP user groups and about the ATP related resources on the Internet ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 8 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Introduction 1 3 History of the ATPDraw development The first version of a simple graphical preprocessor was developed at the Norwegian Institute of Technology in 1991 The program was intended for educational purposes Two demo versions of ATPDraw were demonstrated at the European EMTP Users Group fall meetings in Leuven Belgium in 1991 and 1992 The Bonneville Power Administration BPA USA then contacted the developers with the intention to finance further development of the program The first phase of the project was completed in May 1994 and ATPDraw was made available via the Internet together with its manuals In the second stage of the project completed in December 1995 some important limitations of the previous version were overcome The program becam
18. conductors will be calculated Cy A Pull If selected shunt capacitance and or series impedance matrix of the unreduced system will be calculated ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 178 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Line Cable Manual 6 9 5 Mutual coupling output Requests output for mutual coupling of a three phase power carrier line with a communication line running parallel to this line Available setting options are shown in Fig 6 16 Line Model Mutual coupl output M Metric units M High accuracy FCAR Rho ohmm Freq Hz 100090 M Seg ground Output M Icap w C M Full M Full Fig 6 16 Settings for mutual coupling output Parameter settings are identical with that shown in section 6 9 4 6 9 6 Positive and zero sequence line parameters Positive and zero sequence R L C line parameters will be calculated for several frequencies This option always assumes full transposition of the n conductor system Available setting options are shown in Fig 6 17 Line Model Log freq output M Metric unit V High accuracy FCAR Rho ohmm Freq Hz P M Seg ground DEC PNT Fig 6 17 Settings for sequence values versus frequency Rho The ground resistivity in ohm of the homogenous earth Freq Frequency of the initial frequency point Metric English Switching between the Metric and English unit High accuracy FCAR If button is checked highest accuracy is used in Carson s formulas Se
19. continue the operation using an unresolvable ATP include reference or cancel the entire ATP file generating process Fig 5 9 shows this error dialog as an example Unable to resolve path or extension of library file DAATPORAW NO _USP4LIB LIB When ATP option Auto Path ts on library tiles must be located inthe USP directory and given the extension LIB Strip off file path and extension Fig 5 9 Error dialog when unresolvable LIB object specification is detected 5 4 Modeling an HVDC station This example shows how to create a 6 pulse controlled thyristor rectifier bridge and make it available in ATPDraw as a single object How to create the required Data Base Module DBM file will be explained along with the necessary actions inside ATPDraw Finally a practical example Exa_6 cir where the new object is used to build up a 12 pulse HVDC station including transformers will be shown 5 4 1 Creating a Data Base Module file The first step is to create a DBM file which is an ATP file for the specific circuit along with a header explaining variables in the DBM file The ATP Rule Book 3 chapter XIX F explains in detail how to create such a file The DBM punch file can actually be considered as an external procedure to the final ATP file The process of creating a DBM file is certainly the most difficult part of adding a new object to ATPDraw Below is shown a DBM file describing a 6 pulse thyristor rectifier bridge based on exercis
20. ine PCH Go AK y S EL E sae CH ACC amp lt gt 2 lt 45 fe Sk WY gE ogy Li fib 9 16 i KER lt G6 gt 7 fal xl MODE EDIT Modified 4 Current Status bar with Component action mode menu option hints selection menu Fig 4 1 Main window of ATPDraw for Windows If you are unfamiliar with the use of ATPDraw read the Introductory Manual or the Advanced Manual to learn how to create a circuit and new objects in ATPDraw The Introductory Manual starts with the explanation of operating windows and the mouse in ATPDraw and shows how to build up a circuit and how to create an ATP file to be used as input for a subsequent transient simulation ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 53 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Reference Manual 4 2 Main menu 4 2 1 File Open Ltrl O Dae Ctrl S Sawe All Close Close All Import Export cave Metafile save Postscript Print Ctrl F Frint Setup Exit 4 2 1 1 New This field contains actions for input output of ATPDraw circuits Pressing the File item will result in a popup menu shown in Fig 4 2 Fig 4 2 File menu A selection of this field will open a new empty Circuit window ATPDraw supports to work on several circuits simultaneously and copy information between the circuits The number of simultaneous open windows are limited only by the available MS Windows resources The circuit window is much larger than the actual scree
21. nm 2 gt lt refl gt lt ref2 gt lt R gt lt A gt lt B gt lt Leng gt lt gt lt gt 0 SLXOQOLASOOA io S296 52X0001B500B ed cel Llao S3JXUO0ULCIUUC x0001A500A 2004 O X0001B500B Z200 0 XxX0001C500C 2004 O x0008A Ves pl O X0008B Baad 0 XOO0O08C Awal 0 SENXXA 1 00E7 0 SENXXB 1 00EH7 O SENXXC 1 00E7 0 C JMarti C User specified object C ATPDRAW USP LCC_N3 SUP G IN1 SENXXA C OUTI RESXXA SINCLUDE Jmarti_l SENXXA SENXXB SENXXC RESXXA RESXXB RESXXC SWITCH C lt n 1 gt lt n 2 gt lt Tclose gt lt Top Tde gt lt Ie gt lt V CLOP gt lt type gt ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 136 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Advanced Manual 500A SENXXA PLO 586 Ge 10 0 500B SENXXB s01 TO 0 500C SENXXC 0308 LO O x0008A500A MEERE TO 0 XOOO8B500B ok OnE LO O XOO0O08C500C 1308 LO O SOURCE C lt n 1 gt lt gt lt Ampl gt lt Freq gt lt Phase T0 gt lt Al Sx TA gt lt TSTART gt lt TSTOP gt 14X0001A 0 408248 60 s La 14X0001B 0 408248 OU 20 ilea L 14X0001C 0 408248 Oi 120 Sieg L BLANK BRANCH BLANK SWITCH BLANK SOURCE SENXXASENXXBSENXXCRESXXARESXXBRESXXC500A 500B 500C BLANK OUTPUT BLANK PLOT BEGIN NEW DATA CASE BLANK The results of the simulation are shown in Fig 5 21 1 SENXXA 4 RESXXA Fig 5 21 Switching overvoltages at both ands of a JMarti line 5 5 4 Line to ground fault and fault tripping transients Exa_7a cir In this example the us
22. version 1 0 Reference Manual Input and output to MODELS and usage of each Model are handled automatically by ATPDraw The general structure of MODELS section in an ATP file created by ATPDraw is shown next MODELS INPUT IXOOUL V NODEEL J IXOUUZ vV NODE J OUTPUT FIREL FTRE2 FIRE3 FIRE4 FIRES FTRE6 SINCLUDE C ATPDRAW MOD VALVE_6 mod USE VALVE_6 AS VALVE_6 INPUT UA IX0001 UC IxX0002 DATA ALPHA 3 000H 0001 OUTPUT FIREl GATEI1 FIRE2 GATE2 FIRE3 GATE3 FIRE4 GATE4 FIRES GATES FITRE6 GATE6 ENDUSE ENDMODELS MODEL WALWE 6 x Attributes MODE PHASE NAME UA 1 NODE UL 1 NODE GATE 1 FIRE GATE 1 FIRE GATES 1 FIRE3 GATE 4 1 FIRE4 GATES 1 FIRES GATES 1 FIRES Group Mo fo Label Comment Models Model file D ATPDRAW MOD v Browse Use As VALVE Fig 4 50 Model input window ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 99 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Reference Manual 4 2 9 11 TACS Most of ATP s TACS objects are available in ATPDraw The exceptions are Devices 55 57 and multi line Fortran statements continuation The TACS sub menu on the component selection menu contains the following items Gis K SOUrCeS Fortran 1 Draw relation Devices mae Fig 4 51 Supported TACS objects Transfer functions The first item G s defines a transfer functions in the s domain the next one
23. 0 Introductory Manual Numerical values in the data input windows can be specified as real or integer with an optional exponential integer identified by E or e An Illegal numeric specification message is produced when the characters are non numeric Legal formats are 3 23e4 323E 02 32300 32 3e 3 etc Input texts in the node input menus can be specified with any characters remember that characters like etc should not be used in ATP node names also avoid space and lower case letters The user does not need to give names to nodes in general The name of the nodes without special interest are recommended to be left unspecified ATPDraw will then give a unique name to those nodes The node dot of these nodes are displayed in red color in the circuit window Below the data input column there is a Group No input field This is an integer field where an optional group number can be specified to the object which could be used as a sorting criteria the lowest group number will be written first into the ATP file Below the node input column there is a Label input text field The content of this field is written on the screen and also into the circuit file The label text is movable The component dialog box has a Comment input text field If you specify a text in this field it will be written to the ATP file as a comment 1 e as the first line of the object s data The radio buttons of the Output group specify
24. 10s Tara rA In Japan the password protected ATP directories are accessible at address http atp pwr eng osaka u ac jp support while the publicly available files are at 2 10 3 ftp atp pwr eng osaka u ac jp pub atp World Wide Web Several Web servers have been established mainly for supporting the ATP users in the region However originating from the nature of the Web these services are not limited to the regional Users The ATP related Web servers can be reached by the following URLs USA Canada http Argentina Brasil Europe Japan www ee mtu edu atp http iitree ing unlp edu ar estudios caue http www furnas gov br atp http www vmt bme hu eeug http www02 so net ne jp m_kan index e htm The ATPDraw Web page is available at http www ee mtu edu atp atpdraw ATPDraw html The ATP bulletin board operating in Japan is a new initiative The advantage of the bulletin board over the e mail listserver is that tracking and searching the mail history is more comfortable The ATP WWWBOARD is located at address http www arienter com atpwww ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 24 ATPDraw a for Windows version 1 0 3 Introductory Manual ATPDraw for Windows 1 0 N ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 25 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Introductory Manual This part of the user s manual gives the basic information on how to get started with ATPDraw The Introductor
25. 120 V 3002 Fig 3 3 a Single phase rectifier bridge T Puls NEG Fig 3 3 b Your first circuit EXA_1 CIR The circuit is a single phase rectifier bridge supplied by a 120 Vims 60 Hz source The source inductance is mH in parallel with a damping resistor of 300 Q The snubber circuits across the rectifying diodes have a resistance of 33 Q and a capacitance of 1 uF The smoothing capacitor is 1000 uF and the load resistor is 20 Q The example has been taken from 2 exercise 1 ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 34 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Introductory Manual The units given in Fig 3 3 a are based on settings of Xopt and Copt equal to zero as will be explained later The circuit in Fig 3 3 b has been chosen since its construction involves the most commonly used edit operations 3 7 1 Building the circuit Most parts of the building process will be demonstrated in this chapter along with the explanation of correcting possible drawing errors The normal mode of operation is MODE EDIT You must always be in this mode to be able to select and specify data to objects To return to EDIT from other modes press Esc 3 7 1 1 Starting to create a new circuit Selecting the New command in the File menu or pressing the new empty page symbol in the Component Toolbar a new circuit window will be created 3 7 1 2 Source First an AC source is selected from the floating Component selection menu which appears
26. 2 9 7 Sources DC type 11 Ramp type 12 o Ramp type 13 AL type 14 surge type 15 Heidler type 15 TACS source AL 3 ph type 14 AL Ungrounded DC Ungrounded Fig 4 47 Electric sources in ATPDraw The popup menu under Sources contains the following items ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 94 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Reference Manual DC type 11 DC1PH HE SOURCE DC step source type 11 Current or voltage Ramp type 12 RAME Tps SOURCE Ramp source type 12 Current or voltage S Ramp type 13 SLOPE_RA HOH SOURCE Two slope ramp source type 13 Current or voltage AC type 14 ACIP HOH SOURCE AC source type 14 Current or voltage AC 3 ph type 14 AC3PH Or SOURCE AC source type 14 Current or voltage 3 phase node Surge type 15 SURGE He SOURCE Two exponential source type 15 Current or voltage Heidler type 15 HE IDLER He SOURCE Heidler type source type 15 Current or voltage TACS source TACSSOUR rae SOURCE TACS MODELS controlled type 60 source Current or voltage AC ungrounded ACIPHUG Os SOURCE Ungrounded AC source type 14 18 Voltage DC ungrounded DC1IPHUG H SOURCE Ungrounded DC source type 11 18 Voltage 4 2 9 8 Machines Two categories of electrical machines are available in ATPDraw Synchronous machines and Universal machines ATPDraw does not support machines in parallel or back to back All 3 phase machines are Y connected SM 59 0 TACS oMi 59 TACS Ihd 3 Autolnit hd 3 Kaan Init DC 6
27. 20 VYC XX0002 cer 1 O XX0002 cer 1 O NEG VC CEF 1 0 NEG cer 1 0 XX0002PO0S OL 1 POS NEG 1000 3 POS NEG 20 3 VS XX0025 T O VS XX0025 300 0 SWITCH C lt n 1 gt lt n 2 gt lt Tclose gt lt Top Tde gt lt Ie gt lt V CLOP gt lt type gt 11VC XX0002 O 11 XX0002 O LINEG VC O 11NEG O XX0025VC MEASURING 1 SOURCE C lt n 1 gt lt gt lt Ampl gt lt Freq gt lt Phase T0 gt lt Al gt lt T1 gt OTAR gt 79 TOTOrRP gt 14VS O Torea 60 p hla lz BLANK BRANCH BLANK SWITCH BLANK SOURCE 2POS 7 500000E 0001 2NEG 7 500000E 0001 SPOS NEG 1 500000E 0002 VS BLANK OUTPUT BLANK PLOT BEGIN NEW DATA CASE BLANK You can edit this file or just display it by selecting the ATP Edit file menu 3 7 4 Running ATP simulation in version 1 2 and above ATPDraw allows to execute user specified batch jobs internally One of the most frequently used batch jobs might be to run your current circuit file through ATP performing a simulation directly from ATPDraw This feature is supported via the ATP Edit batch jobs submenu where you can specify your own menu items which are added to the existing commands of the ATP menu Section 2 9 1 of the Installation Manual describes in detail how to create a Run ATP command with a functionality to perform an ATP simulation Assuming ATP BAT is the name of the batch file which invokes TPBIG EXE and the current ATP option has been selected as Parameter ATPDraw execute
28. ATP Edit batch jobs submenu select None as Parameter and Drive Path TPPLOT BAT as the Bath file name TPPLOT BAT must be a single line file again run77 Satpdir stpp exe Properties settings are almost identical with that specified in the previous section except the Screen usage It must be set to Full screen Program Cmd line C ATPDRAW TPPLOT BAT Batch file DBOS_ON BAT Run Normal Window Close on exit checked Font Both font types 7x12 Screen Usage Full screen The corresponding DBOS_ON BAT command which is executed before running TPPLOT is the same as before ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 21 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Installation Manual C dbos3_5 dbos page 800000 800000 limits DBOS to grab all extended memory Moreover it is suggested to modify the settings at the end of the TPPLOT BEG file as shown below C LAB2 comment it out or copy the LAB2 file into your ATPDraw directory FILE ATP PL4 fadd these two commands to the end of the file CHOTCE 2 9 3 How to execute PCPLOT PlotXY and LCC from ATPDraw First create the corresponding Run PCPlot Run PlotXY and Run LCC user specified commands under the ATP Edit batch jobs Then click on the Current PL4 radio button to specify the name of the current pl4 file which is sent as Parameter for the post processors PCPlot PCPlot for Windows PlotX Y PL42MAT and None for LCC Finally Browse and select the name of
29. ATP input file on the form specified in the Settings menu 4 2 4 2 Edit File This selection calls a built in text editor which enables you to contemplate or edit the ATP file When Edit File option is selected a file having the same name as the active circuit file with extension atp is searched for and is automatically opened as shown in Fig 4 13 Text Editor Exa_1 atp File Edit Character BEGIN NEW DATA CASE Generated by ATPDRAW June 40 1998 Bonneville Power Administration program Programmed by H K H idalen at EFI NORWAY 1944 194 Miscellaneous Data Card dl gt lt Tmax lt Mopt gt lt Copt gt 00005 05 SOU 1 1 1 1 1 2 J 4 3456789012 5456 78901259456 7890125456789012Z5456799012Z59456F7 1 HRANCH t8 Modified Fig 4 13 The main window of the built in text editor The status bar at the bottom of the window displays the current line and column position of the text cursor and the buffer modified status Basic text editing facilities Open Save Print Copy Paste Find amp Replace are supported the default text font can be changed by selecting the Font option in the Character menu The text buffer of this editor is limited to maximum 32kB in size however the user can specify his own favorite text editor wordpad exe write exe notepad exe on the Preferences page of the Tools Options dialog box Text Editor option in the Tools menu provides an alternative way of invoking this editor In t
30. At the bottom of the ATPDraw Options dialog box there are five menu buttons provided with the following functionality Option Description OK Stores current settings into program option variables updates the screen and closes the dialog box Changes made will only affect the current session Save Saves the current settings to the ATPDraw ini file Load Loads settings from the ATPDraw ini file Apply Same as OK but does not close the dialog box Help Displays the help topic related to the options on the current page Note that if no initialization file exists ATPDraw creates a new file in its installation directory when you select the Save button or the Save Options option in the Tools menu Preferences On the Preferences page the user can specify the size of undo redo buffers circuit window color and text editor program Undo sreda Buffers 10 Colors Background Window Custom a Frograms Text editor C WINDOW S NOTEPAD ExE Browse Fig 4 30 Customizable program options on the Preferences page The following table lists and describes available options Option Description Undo redo buffers Specifies the number of undo and redo buffers to allocate for each circuit window Changing this option does not affect the currently open circuit windows only new windows will make use the specified value Almost all object manipulation functions object create delete move rotate etc can be undone
31. Cut Cuty Copy Access to the standard clipboard functions Copy Delete Dupl Delete Duplicate Flip Rotate Rotating and flipping the objects icon Rotate Select Select unselect the object s in question Flip Unselect Select Hiealoe Fig 4 54 Available options in the Shortcut menu 4 2 11 Settings in the ATPDraw ini file The ATPDraw initialization file ATPDraw ini contains user specified program options On program startup all program option variables are given default values Then ATPDraw searches the disk for an initialization file and if one is found new parameter values are read from the file into the option variables overriding the default values The initialization file is searched for in the following order 1 In the current directory 2 In the program directory where ATPDraw exe 1s located 3 In Windows installation directory normally c windows 4 In each of the directories specified in the PATH environment variable When a file is found the search process terminates and the file is read If no file is found the default values apply ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 104 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Reference Manual The ATPDraw ini file is a standard Windows initialization file Empty lines or lines that starts with a semicolon sign are ignored A standard initialization file is divided into one or more sections each section contains one or more parameter value lines The ATPDraw ini fil
32. Extra random delay for all switches 1 No random delay 2 Extra random time delay added to all closing switches 3 Extra random time delay added to all opening switches Select probability distribution of switch A value of O zero means Gaussian distribution and a value of 1 uniform distribution If 1 printout of extrema to LUNIT6 for every energization If O zero no such printout Use of standard random generator A value of 0 zero implies computer dependent random generator and a value of 1 standard random generator Extra printed LUNIT6 output for each energization Output of time step loop and variable extrema MAXOUT gt 0 If O zero extra printed output If 1 no such output Repeatable MonteCarlo simulations Possible values are 0 Every simulation on the same data case will be different 1 Same result each time the data case is run on the same computer Usage of Vintage 1 if possible Data file written with BRANCH cards first followed by SWITCH cards and the SOURCE cards The group number given to each object determines the sequence of cards The lowest group number comes first The leftmost object is written first 108 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 AutoPath Boolean BatchJobx name Text BatchJobx filename Text BatchJobx parameter Integer Reference Manual Library files are supposed to be located in the USP folder and have the extension LIB Each library file specification is ve
33. Finally after clicking the Save or Save As buttons the new support file will be saved to disk The file name can be specified in a standard Save dialog box Support files for user specified components are normally located in the USP folder and their extension must be SUP The file name may be different from the DBM file name The new object is found under User Specified Files in the component selection menu If you select LINTR400 SUP in the appearing file window the new object is drawn in the circuit window and can be used and edited like any other objects ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 160 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Advanced Manual 5 8 5 Example circuit Transformer energization Exa_10 cir The application of the new BCTRAN object is shown in this example The study case is controlled energization of an unloaded transformer Controlled switching is the most effective way of avoiding high inrush currents which may stress the transformer windings dynamically A three phase three winding Yyd connected transformer is switched from the earthed star connected 400 kV side while the 132 kV and the 18 kV delta connected buses were unloaded The single line diagram of the simulated system is shown in Fig 5 41 400 132 18 kV HO MVE 250 MVA Yyn0d11 sc Fig 5 41 One line scheme of the simulated case The ATPDraw circuit of the study case is shown in Fig 5 42 UA B Fig 5 42 Transformer energization EX
34. ID in column 1 2 from 93 to 96 manually as shown in the next page It can be done easily using the ATP Edit File feature of ATPDraw and can be automated with the Find amp Replace command of the Text editor The ATPDraw generated ATP file for this study case is listed on the next page ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 162 ATPDraw for Windows C Generated by ATPDRAW Wed 30 Sep 1998 C A Bonneville Power Administration program C Programmed by H K H idalen at EFI NORWAY 1994 1997 SPREFIX C ATPDRAW USP SSUFFIX LIB SDUMMY XYZ000 C Miscellaneous Data Card Cc ar gt x Tmax gt lt Xopt gt lt Copt gt 000005 15 500 5 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 TACS HYBRID TACS 90XX0036 1 90XX0028 1 1FLUXA XX0036 XX0028 1 90XX0051 1 90xx0049 E 1FLUXB XX0051 XX0049 1 90XX0066 ip 90XX0064 1 1FLUXC XX0066 XX0064 1 33FLUXA 33FLUXB 33FLUXC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890 BRANCH C lt n 1 gt lt n 2 gt lt refl gt lt ref2 gt lt R gt lt L gt lt C gt C lt n 1 gt lt n 2 gt lt refl gt lt ref2 gt lt R gt lt A gt lt B gt lt Leng gt lt gt lt gt 0 BRANCH 96T_BUSBT_BUSA 8888 1 SINCLUDE HYSTR400 L BUSA 004 0 L_BUSB 004 0 L_ BUSC 004 0 SOURCASUPLA 2a Goud 0 SOURCBSUPLB 2 63 7 0 SOURCCSUPLC 2 63 7 0 SOURCASUPLA 200 0 SOURCBSUPLB 200 0 SOURCCSUPLC 200 0 H_ BUSA 006 0 H_BUSB 006 0 H_BUSC 006 0 T BUSA Ol 0 T BU
35. KKK KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKHEK i Function set or cancel the gap firing control signal i i Inputs voltage and current across ZnO resistor as x Output the firing signal to the electrical ZnO component 5 KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKK KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKEKKKKKKKKKKKK endcomment INPUT V1 Voltage on positive side of ZNO V V2 Voltage of negative side of ZNO V iczn ZNO current Amps DATA Pset power setting Megajoules msec Eset energy setting Megajoules fdel firing delay msec fdur Firing duration msec VAR power power into ZnO resistor Watts trip Gap firing control signal O or 1 energy energy into ZnO resistor Joules tfire time at which the gap was last fired sec vcap voltage difference across series caps Volts OUTPUT trip HISTORY INTEGRAL power DFLT 0 INIT trip 0 tfire 0 ENDINIT vcap V1 V2 power vcap iczn energy INTEGRAL power ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 142 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Advanced Manual IF trip is already firing AND t tfire gt fdur l e 3 has exceeded firing duration THEN trip 0 cancel the firing signal tfire 0 null the firing time ENDIF IF trip 0 48 n t signaling to rire AND tfire 0 firing condition not yet detected AND power gt Pset 1 e9 power setting exceeded OR energy gt Eset 1 e6 energy setting exceeded THEN ELires set the firin
36. On the Node and Data tabs you must specify the control parameters for the new object Fig 5 10 Size of the new object Data In this window you can specify the names of the data parameters number of digits must be lt the G 18 2 0 0 space used in the DBM file which is 6 in this Fis 6 2500 0 0 case a default value and the Min Max values Cs G 0 01 0 0 Angle Fig 5 11 Data window of the new object The names of the data do not have to be equal to the ones used in the DBM punch file but the sequence of the data must be the same as used in the ARG and NUM card s After you have specified the window contents shown above you just click the Node tab and specify the node control parameters as shown in Fig 5 12 ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 125 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Advanced Manual Modes In this window you must specify the Id names of T the nodes in the Name field the number of phases 1 or 3 in the Phase field and the rer position on the icon border 1 12 in the Position field Codes for the available node positions are shown in the icon at right in Fig 5 12 Fig 5 12 Node window of the new object The names of the nodes do not have to be the same as the names used in the DBM punch file but the sequence of the nodes must be the same as used in the ARG card As default ATPDraw writes all three names of 3 phase nodes in the Include statement but optionally only the first 5 b
37. Overhead line PCH objects Line Cable Constants punch file formats are recognized automatically 1 9 phase distributed constant parameter transmission line 1 9 phase equivalent PI circuits 1 9 phase frequency dependent JMarti line model MODELS Usage of MODELS 1s possible in ATPDraw The user can add his own MODELS procedures to the program ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 10 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Introduction 1 5 Contents of this manual This User s Manual of ATPDraw for Windows contains five parts INSTALLATION MANUAL How to get the program How to install ATPDraw Hardware requirements How to configure your system How to convert existing circuit files How to communicate with other users and program developers INTRODUCTORY MANUAL How to create a circuit in ATPDraw Operating windows Your first circuit Three phase circuits REFERENCE MANUAL Reference of all menus and ATPDraw objects Main menu Component selection menu Map window ATPDraw ini settings ADVANCED MANUAL Other examples How to create new circuit objects in ATPDraw How to use MODELS and INCLUDE in ATPDraw Creating libraries of circuits and user specified libraries Application examples Line energization studies Single phase to ground fault and fault tripping transients Transformer energization inrush currents Shunt capacitor bank switching HVDC station rectifier converter modeling Lightning studies arrester model
38. PULS1_ 98PULS3_54 PULS2 _ 98PULS4_54 PULS3_ 98PULS5_54 PULS4 __ 98PULS6_54 PULS5__ O8GATE1 PULS1_ OR PULS2_ O8GATE2 PULS2_ OR PULS3_ 98GATE3_ PULS3_ OR PULS4_ O8GATE4 PULS4_ OR PULS5_ 98GATE5_ PULS5_ OR PULS6_ 98GATE6_ PULS6_ OR PULS1_ BRANCH SVINTAGE 0 POS_ U A Rsnub_ Csnub_ POS_ U BPOS_ U A POS_ U CPOS_ U A U ANEG_POS_ U A U BNEG___ POS_ U A U CNEG POS _iU A SWITCH LIU APOS__ LIU BPOS_ 11U CPOS___ ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 10 10 LO 18 18 19 Zi 21 28 30 30 36 0L de 24 Zo 1 i SSL 3 22 19 23 3 I3 l 2 3 9 3 OD 8 37 24 30 8 18 20 14 7 iS Or TO 1 1 1 1 il 1 PRR PRR T20 11 11 11 T9 LA AU 20 28 20 L A SaL 1 2 3 La 3 69 Zo a a2 Zi lo 9 I e ee 30 8 18 25 20 14 L od l 1 1 1 1 1 1 00 Oc Se UR LA 14A 142 13 20 20 21 21 Zo 29 29 A9 sA SO 20 o 61 4 s 1 1 2 3 la 3 69 12 25 3 s 13 gt 2L l3 9 17 8 74 17 30 2 30 18 7 25 20 14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 QVAC DLY6OD DLY6OD DLY6OD DLY6OD DLY6OD GATE1_ GATE3_ GATES_ 124 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Advanced Manual 1INEG HU A GATE4 _ 1INEGU B GATE6_ 1INEG OU C GATE2 _ SEOF User supplied header cards follow Ul Deec 95 20411259 ARG U prOo NEG REFPOS REFNEG ANGLE_ Rsnub_ Csnub_ NUM ANGLE_ Rsnub_ Csnub_ DUM PULS1_ PULS2_ PULS3_ PULS4_ PULS5_ PULS6_ MID1__ MID2__ MID3___ DUM GATE _ GATE2_ GATE3_ GATE4_ GATE5_ GATE6_ V
39. Prancead output Li l no Such output Repeatable MonteCarlo simulations Possible values are 0 Every simulation on the same data case will be different 1 Same result each time the data case is run on the same computer The ATP file can be arranged according to four different types of file formats The File format settings page contains four buttons for setting the ATP input file data format and one button for controlling auto path generation The structure of the atp file if options are selected MJ will be defined as follows File format File format M High resolution M Sorting by cards Sorting by group number Sorting by tpos i Auto path Power Frequency Frequency Scan l TACS l Comments Fig 4 17 File format settings ATPDraw version 1 for Windows High resolution Usage of Vintage 1 if possible otherwise no S Vintage cards written to the file Sorting by cards Data file written with BRANCH cards first followed by SWITCH cards and the SOURCE cards Sorting by group The group number given to each object determines the sequence of cards The lowest group number comes first Sorting by XxX pos The leftmost object in the Circuit window is written first Any combination of the three different sorting mechanisms above can be specified Auto path Library files are supposed to have extension lib and located in the USP folder Writes S SPrefix and SSuffix to the ATP file
40. USP JMarti_1 LIB Browse C Old ph 3 phase ORK Cancel Help Fig 5 19 JMarti object input window ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 135 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Advanced Manual 5 5 3 Switching study using the JMarti line Exa_7 cir In this chapter the usage of the JMarti line object 1s demonstrated The 3 phase switching example Exa_3 cir created in section 5 1 of this manual is repeated here this time with a JMarti line instead of the PI equivalent The example circuit is shown in Fig 5 20 Wave imp SEN 500k RES Fig 5 20 JMarti line in switching study EXA_7 CIR No restriction exists in node naming of the 3 phase nodes at the sending receiving end of the line because the corresponding support file and the automatically generated library file support any legal node names The ATP file generated by ATPDraw for this 500 kV example circuit is listed below BEGIN NEW DATA CASE C Generated by ATPDRAW Tue 30 Jun 1998 C A Bonneville Power Administration program C Programmed by H K H idalen at EFI NORWAY 1994 1997 SPREFIX C ATPDRAW USP SSUFPIX LIB SDUMMY XYZ000 C Miscellaneous Data Card POWER FREQUENCY 60 C dT gt lt Tmax gt lt Xopt gt lt Copt gt 00005 2 500 1 1 di 1 0 0 di 0 C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890 BRANCH Cx n dom 2Ze lt retlearei2 gt lt R os ik Se gt C lt n 1 gt lt
41. XOULIC TO 0 XOO13A 1O 0 X0013B TO 0 X0013C 1O 0 XOO15A 1O 0 X0015B 1O 0 XOO15C TO 0 XOO17A 10 0 X0017B 1O 0 XOO17C T 0 C Study of ground fault in line A B SINCLUDE C ATPDRAW USP LIB LIB SWITCH C lt n 126 n 2 gt lt Telose gt lt Top Tde gt lt Ie gt lt V CLOP gt lt type gt X0011AF1A O33 te O X0011BF1B ds 2n O X0011CF1C J Ze O X0013AF2A 2 im O X0013BF2B 2a ce O XOO13CF2C Dea oe O X0015AF3A 2a cp O X0015BF3B as cm O XOO15CF3C De Da 0 X0017AF4A 2 cm O X0017BF4B 2a cap O X0017CF4C Des Ds O SOURCE V C lt n 1 gt lt gt lt Ampl gt lt Freq gt lt Phase T0 gt lt Al gt lt T1 gt lt TSTART gt lt TSTOP BLANK BRANCH BLANK SWITCH BLANK SOURCE F2A F2B F2C BLANK OUTPUT BLANK PLOT BEGIN NEW DATA CASE BLANK Auto path option was assumed to be unselected on the ATP Settings File page so the full path of the library file is written to the ATP file ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 121 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Advanced Manual Otherwise if this option is selected the library files are supposed to be located in the USP folder and have the extension LIB Each library file specification is verified to meet these requirements If the path of a library file specifies a different folder or the extension is not LIB an error dialog is displayed during the ATP file generation process enabling you to correct the erroneous specification by stripping off path and extension
42. a ES E E E E E S E E E E A EE A E E A S E A E E E E E E A E C Generated by ATPDRAW Mon 4 May 1998 C A Bonneville Power Administration program C Programmed by H K H idalen at EFI NORWAY 1994 1997 C P S E E E a a i E A E E E S E A C Miscellaneous Data Card C QAT gt lt Tmax gt lt xXoor gt lt Cope gt 000001 OOT 500 1 1 il i O 0 1 2 3 4 5 C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890 BRANCH C lt n 1 gt lt n 2 gt lt refl gt lt ref2 gt lt R gt lt L gt lt C gt C lt n 1 gt lt n 2 gt lt refl gt lt ref2 gt lt R gt lt A gt lt B gt lt Leng gt lt gt lt gt 0 1 1A 2A TOs 0001 Ls 2 1B 2B 10 0001 1 LOs eT 3 1C 2G TOs 0001 1 TOs OOO 3B 4B Le aoo aC 4C 1 SOO 3A 4A 1 me eel 514B 5B var ies 524C 5C 1 Ls 534A 5A S5S13B 7B i 6 1 523G TC 1 i 533A 7A Ls DISB 6B ip L 525C 6C L Dos B35A 6A La 547C C Ly ip l 557A 8A L La IS 567B 8B La L 8C XX0021 1000 8A XX0023 L 8B XX0025 Os SWITCH C amp n 1 gt lt nm 2 gt lt Tolose gt lt Top Tde gt lt Te gt lt V CLOP gt lt type gt 2A 3A e001 2B 3B sool Ze G 2 G07 SOURCE C lt n 1 gt lt gt lt Ampl gt lt Freq gt lt Phase T0O gt lt Al a T1 141A 0 150000 60 141B 0 150000 60 1 204 141C 0 150000 00 120 BLANK BRANCH BLANK SWITCH BLANK SOURCE BLANK OUTPUT BLANK PLOT BEGIN NEW DATA CASE BLANK ATPDraw version 1 for Windows a 50 ATPDraw a fo
43. a File menu an Edit menu and a Tools menu In addition a Done option appears to the right of the Tools menu if the editor is opened from the Edit Component dialog box Selecting Done changes made to the icon will be accepted Available menu options are described below File options Open Loads the icon of a support file into the icon buffer Save Stores the contents of the icon buffer to disk Import Reads the icon of a support file and inserts it into the icon buffer Exit Cancel Closes the icon editor window If the option displays Exit and the icon buffer has been modified you are given a chance to save the icon before closing If a Done option is available from the main menu this option displays Cancel and the window is closed without any warning with respect to loss of modified data Edit Opvions Undo Cancels the last edit operation Redo Cancels the undo command C t Copies a bitmap version of the icon to the Clipboard and clears the icon buffer This bitmap can be pasted into other applications e g pbrush exe Copy Places a bitmap version of the icon in the Clipboard Paste Inserts the bitmap in the Clipboard into the icon buffer If colors are different from those used in the original bitmap it is because the icon editor calculates which color in its own color palette provides the nearest match to any bitmap Color Delete Clears the icon buffer Tools options Pen Selects the pen drawing tool enabling you to dra
44. be specified in a standard Save dialog box Support files for user specified components are normally located in the USP folder and their extension is SUP The file name may be different from the DBM file name C atpdraw usp HVDC_6 SUP is used in this example You can reload the support files of the user specified objects whenever you like using the Edit User Specified item in the Objects main menu Now a completely new object in ATPDraw has been created The object is found under User Specified Files in the component selection menu If you select HVDC_6 SUP in the appearing file window the new object is drawn in the circuit window and can be used and edited like any other objects ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 127 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Advanced Manual 5 4 3 Example circuit 12 pulse HVDC station Exa_6 cir The 6 pulse rectifier bridge can be used when a 12 pulse HVDC station is to be simulated An example of such an application is shown in Fig 5 15 The example is based on exercise 54 in 2 The HVDC station is supplied by a 3 phase AC source via two transformers In this example the new object HVDC_6 is used two times in series Fig 5 16 shows the data input dialog box of the new object The external library file HVDC_6 LIB created using DATA BASE MODULARIZATION feature of ATP is Include d in this example MODE PHASE NAME AL 3 3 POS 1 POSI MEG 1 Group Mo fo Label
45. click the right mouse button Any objects within the selected region are marked then for selection To cancel region selection press the Esc key INFO START Indicates the start of a relation when TACS Draw relation is activated in the selection menu Clicking the left mouse button on a component node or on the end point of another relation will initiate the drawing of a new relation Relations are used to visualize information flow into FORTRAN statements and are drawn as blue connections but do not influence the connections of components To cancel click the right mouse button or press the Esc key INFO END Indicates the end of a relation The program is waiting for a left mouse button click to set the end point of the new relation To cancel drawing relation click the right mouse button or press the Esc key ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 29 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Introductory Manual Status bar Modified and Hints field The middle field of the status bar is used to display the Modified state of the active circuit As soon as you alter the circuit moving a label deleting a connection inserting a new component etc the text Modified appears indicating that the circuit must be saved before exit The field will be empty when you save the circuit or undo all modifications The rightmost field of the status bar displays the menu option hints 3 3 The Component dialog box After selecting a component in the Comp
46. column 80 punches MaxOut Integer If 1 extrema printed at the end of the LUNIT6 ouput file If O no such print ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 107 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Pun Integer MemSave Integer ICat Integer Nenerg Integer ISW Integer ITEST Integer IDIST Integer IMAX Integer IDICE Integer KSTOUT Integer NSEED Integer HighResolution Boolean SortByCard Boolean SortByGroup Boolean SortByXpos Boolean ATPDraw version 1 for Windows Reference Manual Flag for requesting an additional card for controlling the IOUT frequency If IPUN equals 1 an additional card follows not implemented If IPUN equals 0 zero no such card follows Controls the dumping of EMTP memory to disk at the end of simulation if START AGAIN request is specified A value of 1 indicates memory saving START AGAIN 0 zero implies no memory dumping Controls saving of raw plot data points that is written to the I O channel LUNIT4 Possible values are 0 No saving 1 Save points but ignore any batch mode plot cards present 2 Save points and handle batch mode plot cards Number of simulations A value of 0 zero means single deterministic simulation otherwise statistic switch study NENERG gt 0 or systematic switch study NENERG lt 0 If 1 printout of all variable switch closing opening time to LUNIT If O zero no printout Extra random delay using DEGMIN DEGMAX and STATER in STARTUP Possible values are 0
47. component node can be specified Available node options are Name The name of the node Used to identify the node in the Open Node and Data Nodes Name Phase Position From 1 ee Component dialog boxes To 1 a Phase Number of phases 1 or 3 a p Position Node position on the icon border Fig 4 22 Node control page If Phase is set to 3 the node will be a 3 phase node with a 5 character name ATPDraw adds the extensions A B and C to the node name automatically The figure on the right hand side of the page shows the possible node positions The position should correspond to the icon drawing f Icon Editor Each circuit object has an icon which represents the File Edit Tools Done object on the screen A speed button on the right hand side of the Edit Component dialog box invokes the built in pixel editor where icons can be edited An icon occupies 41x41 pixels on the screen Clicking with the left mouse button will draw the current color selected from a 16 color palette at the bottom Clicking the right button will draw with the gray background color Olive colored lines indicate the possible node positions on the icon border Menu field items of the Icon Editor are described in the Tools Icon Editor section of this manual Fig 4 23 Icon Editor Each standard component has a pre defined help file which can be edited by a built in Help Editor accessible via speed button of the Edit Component dialog
48. connection exists between nodes of different names or if the same name has been given to unconnected nodes Connections can be selected as any other objects To resize a connection click on its end point with the left mouse button hold down and drag If several connections share the same node the desired connection to resize must be selected first Selected connection nodes are marked with squares at both ends of the selection rectangle Relations are used to visualize information flow into Fortran statements and are drawn as blue connections but have no influence on components connectivity Relations are drawn in the same way as drawing a short circuit connection between nodes except that you have to select the TACS Draw relation option in the component selection menu to start the relation drawing You can then draw multiple relations until you click the right mouse button or press Esc key 3 7 Your first circuit Exa_1 cir This chapter describes how to use ATPDraw step by step As an example composing the circuit file of a single phase rectifire bridge see Fig 3 3 is presented Reading this tutorial carefully you will be proficient in the use of the most important ATPDraw functions such as e How to select and assemble components e How to perform edit operations and give data to components e How to give node names draw connections and specify grounding e How to create the ATP input file and perform the simulation rms
49. data window x Cable tpe Tabie das Overhead line e C Transposed Untransposed No of circuits Rho ohmm Freq Hz V Log freq Log freq DEC PNT M Modal output core Nakagawa Single freq X Cancel Fig 6 19 The Notebook style Cable data window Once all the entries in this window have been completed select the OK button to return to the main window of ATP_LCC The Cable data window can be re opened again as many times as you need using the Edit data command To obtain on line help select the Help button at any time ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 180 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Line Cable Manual Settings for the three cable classes are described next The name of the parameters used in the line and cable data windows are similar to the ones used in Chapter XXIII CABLE CONSTANTS part of the ATP Rule Book 3 The relatively new CABLE PRAMETERS supporting routine of ATP is not supported yet by ATP_LCC it should be noted 6 10 1 Overhead line Cable type data tab Cable type Overhead line e C Transposed Untransposed No of circuits Single freq l Rhojohmm Freq Hz 100000 M Log freq Log freq DEC PNT F Modal output core Nakagawa slayer DEP12 m DEP23 m Rho2 ohmm 1000 Rho3fohmm Fig 6 20 Cable type settings for overhead line modeling Line The line is transposed untransposed Number of circuits NPC Number of circuits which mak
50. even large circuits can be saved graphically without loss of resolution seen on the screen when the Zoom option is used Copy as Metafile command supports the Windows standard metafile format so the product of this operation can be pasted into other applications which also support this file format specification ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 58 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Reference Manual 4 2 2 7 Copy as Bitmap Windows 3 x only Copies the selected objects to the clipboard as a Windows Bitmap object The 16 bit version of ATPDraw supports only the bitmap representation of a circuit which results in poorer resolution when copying them to the clipboard 4 2 2 8 Delete Removes selected objects from the circuit window Short key Del 4 2 2 9 Select Group This option lets the user select a range of objects by specifying a polygon shaped region in the circuit window A selected group of objects can be moved then and edited like a single object Short key Ctrl G By selecting this menu item the mouse cursor turns into a pointing hand the cursor is locked in and moved to the middle of the circuit window The action mode also changes to MODE GROUP in the status bar A click with the left mouse button will create a corner in a polygon click and release the button and a rubber band line is drawn between the starting point and the current mouse cursor A click with the right mouse button will close the polygon All components
51. file for the Object cccsssssssssseseeeecceceeeeeeeeesaeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 126 5 4 3 Example circuit 12 pulse HVDC station EXG_6 CIP ccccccccccsseeeesssseecccceeeeeeeeeaeaaaaaessssseeeeeeeees 128 5 5 Using Overhead Line PCH OD CIS wrsicsseeesniencnsscbiieusretasaactoninenteaadavensGiaidesantabieaataaiebeesisinaushidasiectoniet 131 55 1 Creatine Line Constants data TCS vs is s00tssiusioncssdueatiadsnestutedvensncicosoeddadusesitveivessanisososidedusutledsaneulens 131 5 5 2 Creating new Overhead Line PCH ObJects c cc cccccccsssssssessseseeeeeeeeeeeeeseseaeassseeeeeeeeeeeeees 134 5 5 3 Switching study using the JMarti line Exa_7 cir cccccccccccccccsssseessesssseecceceeeeeeeeeseaaaaaaseseeeeeeseeeees 136 5 5 4 Line to ground fault and fault tripping transients EXQ_7G CI ccccssececceecccceceeeeeeeeeeaeaaeeeeeeseeees 137 ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 3 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 OSA Or MODE E S assets seem E E E EE 142 SGE Cn e Model E T 142 5 6 2 Creating new MODELS object in ATPDraw ec ccccccccsssssseseseseeeeceeeeeeeeeesesaeaesseeeeeeeeeeeeees 143 5 6 3 Using MODELS controlled switches DC68 DAT EXQ_S CIP ccccccccccccccccceceeeeeeneaeaeeeeeseseeees 145 5 7 Lightning overvoltage studies in a 400 kV substation EXd_9 CIr ccccccccceccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeaeasseeeeeseeees 150 5 8 Simulating transformer inrush CUITENIS cceeeessseeeceecceceeeeeeeaaaeaeessseseeeeeeeeeeeeee
52. for Windows program has a functionality similar to the DOS version 1 The Component selection menu is hidden however but appears immediately when you click the right mouse in the open area of the Circuit window Fig 3 1 shows the main window of ATPDraw containing two open circuit windows ATPDraw supports multiple documents and offers the user ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 27 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Introductory Manual to work on several circuits simultaneously along with the facility to copy information between the circuits The size of the circuit window is much larger than the actual screen as it is indicated by the scroll bars of each circuit window The Main window consists of the following parts Header Frame As a standard Windows element it contains the system menu on the left side a header text and minimize maximize exit buttons on the right side The main window is resizeable System menu Contains possible window actions Close Resize Restore Move Minimize Maximize or Resize and Next The last one exists only if multiple circuit windows are open Header text The header text is the program name in case of the main window and the current circuit file name in case of the circuit window s To move a window click in the header text field hold down and drag Minimize button A click on this button will iconize the main window Maximize button A click on this button will maximize the window The maxim
53. from the selection menu as shown in Fig 3 13 After you have clicked on Diode the diode appears in the circuit window in marked moveable mode and enclosed by a rectangle The diode has to be rotated so click the right mouse Switch T 1 button or select Edit in the main menu and click on Sous Sheen Rotate The diode is now rotated 90 deg counter Machines ee ee clock wise Click on the diode with the left mouse Switch c button hold down and drag to the position shown in Transformers EER ee wos cy fs 1 MODELS Tate TACS to Fig 3 13 Selecting a diode Click with the left mouse button on empty area to place the diode Remember the grid snap facility and the overlap warning peta i Next you must select the snubber circuit across the diode In this example the snubber circuit is a resistor and a capacitor in series Fig 3 14 l Select an RLC object from the component selection menu Fig 3 5 Click on the selected RLC branch with the right mouse button to rotate then click with the left button hold down and drag the RLC branch to be in parallel with the diode Click on the left mouse button to place The idea is further to copy the diode and the RLC branch but before doing so it is wise to give data to them since the data are kept when copied A simple click on the RLC or diode icon with the right mouse button activates the component dialog box to give data to objects ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 3
54. having their centre inside the polygon and all connections having both endpoints inside the polygon will be included in the group The selected group can be the subject of most editing operations Move click left button hold down and drag Only the polygon is drawn while moving Rotate Copy Duplicate Delete or Export in the File menu To unselect a group just click with the left mouse button outside the polygon in an empty area of the circuit window You can also enter this mode by double clicking the left mouse button in an empty area of the circuit window To close the polygon and unlock the mouse press the right mouse button 4 2 2 10 Select All Selects all objects in the current circuit window Short key Ctrl A 4 2 2 11 Unselect Cancels the selection of objects Short key Ctrl A Note that this operation may cause selected objects to be moved to the nearest grid point also called gridsnapping You can also unselect by clicking the left mouse button in an empty area of the circuit window 4 2 2 12 Move Label All circuit objects have a label specified in the object input window These labels are moveable and written on the screen in blue component label or in red color node name By selecting the Move Label menu item the mouse cursor turnes to a pointing hand and moves to the middle of the ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 59 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Reference Manual circuit window The action mode ind
55. into the current cable Cable number Select actual cable number Change the maximum number under Cable type tab Core data R1 inner radius of tubular core Specify 0 for solid core R2 outer radius core R3 gt outer radius of lst insulator RhoC resistivity of core conductor muc relative permeability of core mull relative permeability of lst insulator ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 186 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Line Cable Manual epsI1l relative permittivity of lst insulator Sheath data Activate this field by selecting the Sheath check box Grounded When selected the sheath is grounded R4 gt outer radius of sheath R5 z outer radius of 2nd ansulacor Rhos gt resistivity of Sheath conductor muC relative permeability of sheath conductor mul2 relative permeability of 2nd insulator epsI2 relative permittivity of 2nd insulator Armor data Activate this field by selecting the Armor check box Grounded When selected the armor is grounded R6 gt outer radius of armor R7 gt outer radius of 3rd insulator RHOA resistivity Ol armor conductor muA relative permeability of armor conductor muIl3 relative permeability of 3rd insulator epsI3 relative permittivity of 3rd insulator P sition Vert Positive distance to ground surface Horiz horizontal position to user selectable reference line The parameter NGRND of ATP is established automatically based on t
56. long 500 kV overhead line from John Day to Lower Monumental taken from benchmark DCN3 DAT The line configuration is given in Fig 6 27 All parameters are in English units The phase conductors are tubular with T D 0 364 DC resistance 0 05215 2 mile Outside diameter of the conductors 1 602 inch The sky wires are solid so T D 0 5 DC resistance 2 61 Q mile ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 188 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Line Cable Manual Outside diameter of the ground wires is 0 386 inch The earth resistivity is equal to 100 ohm meter 12 9 feet 20 feet 98 5 feet 77 5 feet 0 1 5 feet _ gt lt q 50 feet Ui Ui Fig 6 27 Line configuration In ATP_LCC the geometrical and electrical data of the system can be specified in a two pages tabbed notebook style Line data window This window appears when you select the New Line option in the Fi e menu or when an existing line cable data file 1s selected in the File Open Example case Exa_7 cir of the Advanced Manual requires an untransposed frequency dependent line model Settings for this case are shown in Fig 6 28 Line Model and in Fig 6 29 Conductor card This tabbed window is displayed on the screen by performing a File Open and loading the JMARTI_1 LIN into ATP_LCC Settings in the Line Model and Conductor cards for JMarti modeling are described in section 6 9 of this manual and in Chapter XVII JMARTI setup of
57. machine Automatic type 1 initialization 3 phase armature SM 1 Man Init SM_1MI Bue UM MACHINE Synchronous machine Manual type initialization 3 phase armature Next a part from the help file is shown for the Type 3 Universal machines describing the modeling of the external electrical network for torque representation ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 96 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Mechanical network Shaft mass moment of inertia lkg m2 lt gt 1 Farad Shaft section spring constant 1 Nm rad lt gt 1 Henry Shatt friction Viscous damping 1 Nm rad s lt gt 1 ohm Angular speed lt gt Voltage 1 rad s lt gt 1 Volt Torgue lt gt Current 1 Nm lt gt 1 Amp Angle lt gt Charge 1 rad lt gt 1 Coulomb Reference Manual lt gt Capacitance lt gt Inverse inductance lt gt Conductance Ta n OOOO J1 K1 J2 gt T a i lt gt Cl R C2 gt R2 OI lt __ __ 1 2 Ciad1 Ce I2 Rl 1 D1 B2 17D2 Ll 1 F1 1 7 4 2 9 9 Transformers Ideal 1 phase sat 1 phase Sat DY 3 ph Sat YD 3 ph Sat Y Y 3 ph Sat D D 3 ph sat YD 3 ph sat yy en Fig 4 49 Available transformer models The popup menu under Transformers contains the following items Sat 1 phase TRAFO_S BRANCH TRANSFORMER Ide I phase TRAP Ol SOURCE type 18 Sat A Y 3 ph TRADY_3 BRANCH T
58. oo Lae RS P no r E 173 STA DOU r A E E E E 173 G9 E D EEE E E E AE E E AO A E E 174 6 9 1 Constant parameter line mode Ua ss as ceases caqence sans sen ayacceccinen teen NEE EENE EEEE EEK 176 092 Pireguiyalent line TO Speen das Sega eden nccs sh E E EEEE 176 IV TO sass 05 soo seraatia sao aioea cca aaoose snodaiseacdoscoessanusesssenisieosatncasiosiesed sognesecsani nts aacnesasiesae 177 6 9 4 Matrix output of the line paraMetePs ccccccecececcccecccceeccaaaeessseeeeeecceceeeeeeauaaesssseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 178 6 9 5 Mutual coupling OUtpUt eee ecceeesesssseeeseeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 179 6 9 6 Positive and zero sequence line ParaMetePS ccccccccccccccacassesssssseseeeecceeeeeeeseeausssseeeeeeeeeeeeeess 179 CIO Tie Ca IS Cala W IMG OW oo acsecetoet cadeaiiearenctw E O E E E E 180 AOT Cie aC TIME ors satareeacneecnsassusnat E E E E E 181 6 10 2 Cable WOU CMC OS Mo 1 cca evecare ct reii ANE N E 184 6 1073 Cable systemi Wil CM COSI PiP ecesna EEEE 187 G1 Application example Secoren gri sue sensauavecuand aniseed dob reeg inn ereire ap ira Anciena 188 6 1 1 JMati modelof a300 KV Ue cassier enna aa a aE Eoria aenant 188 1l 2JMati modelota 750 KV line sesruro eani a an eae a ee n iaa on Eii 191 PEE e CC E A A A E A A E AA 193 ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 4 ATPDraw oe for Windows version 1 0 1 Introduction ATPDraw for Windows 1 0 N ATPDraw ve
59. or redone Since only a limited number of buffers are allocated you are never guaranteed to undo all modifications Background color Selects the background color of circuit windows The color list provides available system colors but you may customize your own from the Windows standard Color dialog displayed by the Custom button The current color selection is shown in the box to the right of the Custom button Text editor Holds the name and path of the text editor program to use program for editing ATP files e g notepad exe or wordpad exe If no program is specified the field is empty the built in ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 19 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Reference Manual text editor is used Note that the program specified must accept a filename on the command line otherwise the ATP file will not be automatically loaded by the editor Directories The following table lists and describes available options on the Directories page Option Description Circuit folder The directory where you store your circuit files cir ATP folder Specifies the directory in which atp files are created Support folder The container of standard component support files sup Model folder Directory containing support sup and model mod files for MODELS components TACS folder The container of standard TACS component support files User spec folder Directory containing support sup library lib and punch pch f
60. points that is written to the I O channel LUNIT4 O No saving 1 Save points but ignore any batch mode plot cards present 2 Save points and handle batch mode plot cards Number of simulations A value of O zero means Single deterministic simulation otherwise Statistic switch study NENERG gt 0 or systematic switch study NENERG lt 0 66 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Reference Manual Switch settings Switch ISW swell mest sT fo mafo Dice fl KSTOUT 1 NSEED 0 Fig 4 16 Switch settings TEST IDIST IMAX LDICE KSTOUT NSEED If l printout of all Variable switch closing opening time to LUNITG If 0 zero no Printout Extra random delay using DEGMIN DEGMAX and STATFR in STARTUP Possible values are 0 Extra random delay for all switches 1 No random delay 2 Extra random time delay added to all closing switches 3 Extra random time delay added to all opening switches Select probability distribution of switch O zero means Gaussian distribution and a value of 1 uniform distribution If 1 printout of extrema to LUNIT6 for every energization If 0 zero no such printout Use of standard random generator A value of 0O zero implies computer dependent random generator and a value of 1 standard random generator Extra printed LUNIT6 output for each energization Output of time step loop and variable extrema MAXOUT gt 0 If O zero extra
61. rectangle must surround both end points To move the selected group of objects press and hold down the left mouse button inside the group while you move the mouse You unselect and confirm the new position by clicking in an empty space Any overlapping components will produce a warning ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 83 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Reference Manual To move objects outside the visible part of the circuit use the window scrollbars or the view rectangle in the map window Any selected object or group will follow the window to its new position You rotate objects by clicking the right mouse button inside the selected object or group Other object manipulation functions such as undo redo and clipboard options are found in the edit menu However the most frequently used object manipulation functions can be accessed by holding down the Shift key while clicking with the right mouse button on an object or a selected group of objects This will display and activate the circuit window shortcut menu Components and component nodes can be opened for editing If you right click or double click an unselected component or node either the Component Open Probe or Open Node dialog box will show allowing you to change component or node attributes and characteristics If you double click in a selected group of objects the Open Group dialog box will show allowing you to change attributes common to all components in that group suc
62. repeatedly clicking the left mouse button in the circuit window To close the region click the right mouse button on the last polygon point you want to set Objects that are defined to fall within the indicated region or rectangle are added to the selected objects group For components this means that the center point of a component icon must lie within the defined region or rectangle For connections and relations the region or rectangle must surround both end points To move the selected group of objects press and hold down the left mouse button inside the group while you move the mouse You unselect and confirm the new position by clicking in an empty area Any overlapping components will produce a warning To move objects outside the visible part of the circuit use the window scrollbars or the view rectangle in the map window Any selected objects or group will follow the window to its new position Objects or group can be rotated by clicking the right mouse button inside the selected object or group Other object manipulation functions such as undo redo and clipboard options can be found in the Edit menu Additionally the most frequently used object manipulation functions can be accessed by holding down the Shift key while clicking with the right mouse button on an object or on a Selected group of objects This will display and activate the circuit window shortcut menu Components and component nodes can be opened for editing If you right cli
63. seers a certs NT lords ato rsoate A Glo desde sloaaie ea onesie reese A 65 ERA IV IN AN lt EEEE EEE EERE EEE ETE E EE EAE 65 E E E NNN EEE O E OE A A A A AE ENA TE IE TOO AT 66 4 2 4 5 Edit batch jobs in version 1 2 and above oooeennnenensssssseeeeeeennnnnssssssssssssseeeeesssssssssssssseeees 68 ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 2 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 hi OD OCS EEA EEE EEEE ENAA EEEE EEN AOE EEEN EA 69 AA ENE CONPONAT 69 TLE E Ae OPON eea E E E E 69 k NWU Se SP e e E A E A AEA EONS 72 Be I SCL yl CN arrestee cent S T2 W NCW VOC koea n E oases ed sees soacebac enact sees tne eoeeretes obad sao qesebennseaesdtoseaes 73 AD ROETE IOC ersa E E E 73 BUTTA cara terrcrpercsnnerectsatobeete E E EA E E TE 73 AA OO lS E EE S E E E E E NE ETE EE O ieostesedesss 74 Pi Oe UCONN Re UN ON a E cet saves ctitoar E TT E T rezone O E 74 hie O HP eV OL sce ccjesseconpel ae eassa aut eananousie E E 75 ED MCU O tia sates ecg sss ocean A AA sen ones yes eat neeene E eenenemyecieveecu cena E 76 A FEO TONS assets agg E apne oe eens a eeaniase oeedsvea tense eee coe aauees vent eeeeoaee 77 PO AY SI PIOUS a E O oe 80 Dd VV WOW ee e e E E EE E EE adsceieasenaseass 80 WA NDAN TTT ON ee a E oid nse Sa E E E E onda estetoein cates ee 81 AD TNC Mp AA EE E sess E REE A S TA EE PEE E E E ATOE 82 A e E DICS E E A E A E A A E T 82 AE ODN Vy T ER E TE E AA TEE E EE eet 84 AD POU TEO a E E EE EA EA AE T E 84 42 9 Component selection Men s a A
64. shown in Fig 3 31 appears F Auto path Select Power F Beene ey M Sorting by cards First BRANCH then SWITCH and then SOURCE Frequency Scar OK Hep TACS l Comments Help All other check boxes are unselected Fig 3 31 The file format menu To create an ATP file you must select the Make File in the ATP menu This selection will start a procedure which examines your circuit and gives node names to circuit nodes Then a standard Windows Save As file window appears where you can specify the name and path of the ATP file The same name as the circuit file with extension ATP is suggested You can load an old circuit whenever you like select File Open and create the corresponding ATP file select ATP Make File The ATP file EXA_1 ATP you just have created will look as follows ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 46 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Introductory Manual C Generated by ATPDRAW Sat 3 May 1998 A Bonneville Power Administration program Programmed by H K H idalen at EFI NORWAY 1994 1997 OO C Miscellaneous Data Card aT gt lt Tmax gt lt Xopt gt lt Cope gt 00005 05 500 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890 BRANCH Cs m lex n 2esretle lt retz lt R o lt Lb 2 lt C gt C lt n 1 gt lt n 2 gt lt refl gt lt refz gt lt R gt lt A 3 lt B gt lt Leng gt lt gt lt gt
65. smoothing capacitor with initial condition and a load resistor First you can select the capacitor as shown in Fig 3 21 Frobes amp 3 phase Branch Linear Resistor Branch Nonlinear Capacitor Line Lumped Inductor Line Distributed BLE Switches ELE 3 ph o Rph aa reer D RLC Fph Machines ENEA eee Pcum T Transtormers L KD Fig 3 21 Select capacitor with initial condition After this selection the capacitor appears in the middle of the circuit window in moveable mode enclosed by a rectangle Click on the capacitor with the left mouse button hold down and drag to a desired position then click the right mouse button 3 times or press Ctr R to orient the capacitor as shown in Fig 3 22 Finally click on open space to place the capacitor Fig 3 22 Placing a capacitor with initial conditions Next select the load resistor in the component selection menu Branch linear Resistor The resistor 1s drawn in moveable mode in the circuit window Select Edit Rotate to rotate the resistor Click on it with the right mouse button to rotate then click with the left mouse button hold down and drag it to a desired position and place as shown in Fig 3 23 Fig 3 23 Place load resistor ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 42 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Introductory Manual The time has come to connect the load to the rest of the diode bridge The process has been explained before Click on
66. specific file can be selected either by typing the name directly or by a left mouse click in the file list Clicking OK will perform the selection made and the file is loaded into a new circuit window Clicking on Cancel will simply close the window 4 2 1 3 Save Stores the circuit that is currently active to a disk file If the name Noname cir 1s shown in the circuit window a Save As dialog box will be performed where the user must specify the current circuit file name Short key Ctr S 4 2 1 4 Save As Always performs the Save As dialog box like the one shown in Fig 4 3 or in Fig 4 4 where the user must specify a file name for the current circuit This command allows the user to save the circuit in the current window under a name other than that is already used 4 2 1 5 Save All Stores all open circuits in its own circuit files If an open circuit still has not got a name Noname cir it will be requested in Save As dialog boxes successively 4 2 1 6 Close The current circuit window will be closed If any changes to the current circuit have not been saved yet the user will be queried as shown in Fig 4 5 to confirm before the circuit is closed ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 55 ATPDraw for Windows DRAW version 1 0 Reference Manual 4 2 1 7 Close All Close all circuit windows If a circuit has been modified since the last Save operation a message will be displayed prompting the user for confirmation Q save c
67. sup Linep 2 sup Linezt_ sup Nilin tsup Dc Ban sup Ir Sr sup Linepi 3 sup Linezt_3 sup Nlinres sup i Ind _i0 sup Liner sup Linezt_6 sup Frobe_i sup H Files of type supporttiles sup Cancel Fig 4 20 Specify the support file to edit Edit Component Linezt_1 sup Data Nodes Speed button to the Help Editor 500 0 F Speed button to 300000000 0 the Icon Editor BOO 0 1 0 Fig 4 21 Control page of object data On the Data page of the Edit Component dialog box five control variables of each data parameters of the support file one row for each object data parameter can be specified The following table describes available parameter options Name The name of the parameter Used to identify the parameter in the Component dialog box This name often reflects the name used in the ATP Rule Book DIGIS Maximum number of digits allowed in the Component dialog box This field is more important for user specified components in SINCLUDE statement Default Initial value of the parameter Min Max Minimum Maximum value allowed An error message will appear in the Component dialog box if a parameter value is out of range To cancel range checking set Min Max e g set both equal to zero ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 70 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Reference Manual Clicking the Node tab on the Edit Component dialog box the node attributes of the support file one row for each
68. support and the utility Convert The latter makes possible the usage of existing circuit files created by the DOS version of ATPDraw under the new environment ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 CONTENTS Page L O O e e e E E N E E E E E E 5 LIA Ba ATED e E E E E E satdaracunaectonaauaceuptobannameandccues 7 L2 Shorr decnipion ol ALP serren a E E EE ETE E 7 1 3 History of the A TPDraw development iiicc cevesivsionussiventtadscesctsadvencaticesouiusdanesdvaeivesturdceassudedweeeladsossedendvens 9 1 4 Available components in ATPDIiraw cccccccssssssssssseeeeccceeeeeeeeeaaeausesssseeeseceeeeeeeseseauaasasssssseseseeeeeeeeess 9 De OMe tsk UNIS AANA E E E A E E O EE E A T A A 11 EE Ea 01 1 6 E eer E A A A EA ET 12 2 NS Call acl Om Mantal ss serieen aeaaaioii 13 2A How 10 enep o a ee EE E EE E E E 15 2 2 Program installation under Windows O5 NT cccccccccccceececeeeeeeaseesessseeseeceeeeeeesesauaaaessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 15 2 3 Programi installation Under WindOWS J X wnseiicccxccdcadsscusdnssuoseescaencsabebaewbadeesesdensnetenseadvassbaddsensdarewondeaneds 16 2 4 Hardware requirements under Windows 95 NT cc cccccccccccccccecceeeeeeeesesseeeceeceeeeeeeeeasaeesssseseeeeeeeeeeeees 17 2 5 Hardware requirements under Windows 3 X sssssseecccccceceeeceecaaaeeeesssssseeeeeeeeeesesaaaaaeessseseeeeeeeeeeeeees 17 ZO Oo WP PAG oa cacao e A A E E E E A EA 17 DOA ray command line OUI ONS rasore e AEE EE a 17 2 1 Converting ex
69. the ATPDraw directory structure is as follows when typing dir in the DOS window ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 15 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Installation Manual Volume in drive C is ATP_WORK Volume Serial Number is 1509 18CF Directory of C atpdraw lt DIR gt 96202 1 0 8 28 a lt DIR gt 96 307216 Cee ex CIR lt DIR gt 26 202 10 8 28 Cir ATP lt DIR gt Ie U2 LO 8 28 ATP SUP lt DIR gt 96202210 Gedo SUP MOD lt DIR gt 96202216 8 28 Mod TAC lt DIR gt Toal 1S 8 28 Tac USP lt DIR gt 96 607 Ace 8 28 Usp ATPDRAW HLP 75 049 97 06 10 1 08 ALP Draw ATPDRAW EXE 786 432 98 08 25 12 37 ATPDraw exe ATPDRAW CNT Z 084 97 06 07 18 08 ATPDraw CNT 5 file s 863 565 bytes 8 dir s 714 047 488 bytes free 2 3 Program installation under Windows 3 x To install ATPDraw under Windows 3 x perform the following operations 1 Create a directory for ATPDraw C gt md atpdraw 2 Copy ad_winl6 exe to ATPDraw directory C gt copy ad_winl6 exe atpdraw 3 Change current directory to the newly created ATPDraw directory C gt ced atpdraw 4 Run ad_winl16 exe to unpack and install ATPDraw for Windows C atpdraw gt ad_winl6 d NOTE Make sure you specify the d option to ad_winl6 exe otherwise the required subdirectories will not be created If patch files were also provided on the ftp site download and unzip them and copy the contents to the appropriate ATPDraw directory Having the ATPDraw installed you can cre
70. the Bath file name It is always the user s responsibility to provide the internal commands of that batch files in the correct format a If you are using Watcom ATP the suggested single line command of ATP BAT is Swatdir tpbigw exe PARAMS 1 for PARAMS disk 1 r b If you are using Salford ATP the ATP BAT file should be as follows run77 exe atpdir tpbig exe PARAMS 1 for PARAMS disk 1 r Under Win95 NT it is wise to set the ATP BAT Properties as shown next ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 20 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Installation Manual Program Cmd line C ATPDRAW ATP BAT Batch file DBOS_ON BAT leave empty if Watcom ATP is used Run Normal Window Close on exit checked Font Both font types 7x12 Screen Usage Window In case b a single line batch file DBOS_ON BAT must be executed before running the TPBIG EXE Assuming DBOS ver 3 5 is installed in the directory dbos3_5 on drive C the corresponding command must be C dbos3_5 dbos page 800000 800000 limits DBOS to grab all extended memory Under Windows 3 1x the commands in the ATP BAT and DBOS_ON BAT can be merged into a single file called ATP BAT dbos page 400000 run77 tatpdir tpbig exe PARAMS disk 1 r 2 9 2 How to execute TPPLOT from ATPDraw Because TPPLOT is also a DBOS application settings are very similar to those specified in case b of the previous section When you create a Run TPPLOT command using the
71. the component nodes you wish to connect with the left mouse button sequentially A left mouse click on open area while in MODE CONN END generates a new node dot that can be used as the starting point of any new connections This way creating a circuit having only perpendicular connections recommended for complex circuits to improve the circuit readability is a relatively simple task as shown in Fig 3 24 Fig 3 24 Your first circuit is almost ready After you have finished connecting the source side and the load side of the circuit you can specify the load data Click with the right mouse button on the capacitor and specify the parameters shown in Fig 3 25 Component CAP_UO x Attributes MODE PHASE NAME POS 1 MEG 1 Group Mo fo Label Comment Output C Current C Voltage f Cur olt C Power amp Energy OK Cancel Help Fig 3 25 Capacitor data with initial condition The capacitance is 1000 uF Gf Copt 0 in ATP Setting Simulation The positive node has an initial voltage of 75 V and the negative 75 V Both branch current and voltage will be calculated so the Curr amp Volt radio button is selected in the Output field Once all the entries in the component dialog box are completed select the OK button to close the window and update the object values or click Help to obtain an on line help To cancel the description modification of the element select the Cancel button Whe
72. the pipe center Always specify Center gt 0 Cable data tab Settings on the Cable data tab are almost identical with that used for single core cables see the previous section 6 10 2 The reference point now is the pipe center so the location of cables inside the pipe must be given in polar coordinates in the Position field Position Dist m Angle deg Position Vert Positive distance from pipe center to cable center Angle Angular position of the cable measured counter clockwise 6 11 Application examples The Line Constants cases shown here as application examples of the use of ATP_LCC program have already been referenced in section 5 5 1 and 5 5 4 of the Advanced Manual As it is explained there ATPDraw recognizes the large majority of punch files created by the Line Cable constants support of ATP automatically so such files can be used as input for the Overhead Line PCH objects It means that for most of the cases users do not need to create supporting files to Include a PCH file into their ATPDraw circuit I e ATPDraw recognizes the most frequently used file formats frequency dependent constant parameter PI equivalent specified in the punch files and creates a DBM compatible library file automatically and applies the proper supporting files This section of the manual describes how to create such a punch file by using the ATP_LCC program 6 11 1 JMarti model of a 500 kV line The example line is a 138 miles
73. user can rearrange the open circuit windows or select the active circuit window This menu contains a command for displaying or hiding the Map window Fig 4 32 shows the available menu options ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 80 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Reference Manual window Her Tile Cascade Arrange Icons Map Window ha Exa_1 cir 2 Ex a_2 cir Fig 4 32 Supported options on the Window menu 3 Exa_3 cir Tile The Tile command arranges the circuit windows horizontally in equal sizes to fit on your screen To activate a circuit click the title bar of the window The active circuit window is marked by a v symbol in front of the name of the circuit file Cascade The Cascade command lays the circuit windows on each other with the title bars visible To activate a circuit click the title bar of the window Arrange Icons The Arrange Icons command arranges the icons of the minimized circuit windows so that they are evenly spaced and don t overlap 4 2 7 1 Map Window The Map Window command displays or hides the map window The map window is a stay on top window meaning that it will always be displayed on top of all other windows This window displays the entire contents of the active circuit The circuit window itself is represented by the map rectangle and circuit components are drawn as black dots Fig 4 33 Map window When you press and hold down the left mouse button in the map recta
74. with a right mouse click on open area of the circuit window Fig 3 4 shows how to select a single phase sinusoidal voltage source Sources AC type 14 using the mouse Frobes amp 3 phase Branch Linear Line Lumped Branch Nonlinear Line Distributed Switches OC type 11 Machines Ramp type 12 o Ramp type 13 Transtormers MODELS surge type 15 TACS Heidler type 15 TACS source User Specified a Overhead Line PCH AL sph type 14 AL Ungrounded DC Ungrounded Fig 3 4 Selecting an AC source After you have clicked in the AC type 4 field the selected source appears in the circuit window enclosed by a rectangle Click on it with the left mouse button hold down and drag it to a desired position Then click with the left mouse button in open space to place it The AC object is k redrawn in red color as an indication that no data have been given to the object ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 35 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Introductory Manual Next select the source inductance as shown in Fig 3 5 Frobes amp 3 phase Branch Linear Resistor Branch Nonlinear Capacitor Line Lumped Inductor Line Distributed BELE Fig 3 5 Selecting an inductor After you have clicked in the nductor field the selected inductor appears in the circuit window enclosed by a rectangle Click on it with the left mouse button hold down and drag it to a position shown in Fig 3 6
75. x L x lt C gt C lt m 124 n 2o lt refl gt lt refz gt lt R gt lt A 2 lt B Ye lt Leng gt lt gt lt gt 0 NEUT Te00E6 2 BUSMG I NG E 1 BUSMG 2x 00ES 3 BUSMG BUSMS 1 0E 6 1 NEUT BUSC 10000 2 NEUT BUSB 10000 2 NEUT BUSA 10000 2 BUSA VA 001 1 BUSB VB 001 1 BUSC VC O01 1 SWITCH C lt n ts n 2 gt lt close gt lt Top Ide gt x Ie gt lt V CLOP gt lt type gt SOURCE C lt n 1 gt lt gt lt Ampl gt lt Freq gt lt Phase T0 gt lt Al gt lt T1 gt lt TSTART gt lt TSTOP gt L4BUSMS 1 374 03869 00001 60VC O 60VB O 60VA 0 19 UM O BLANK 3 1 1331BUSMG 2 1885 60 C Magnetization inductances 182 840692 016 sT OD39I8 L63 016 C Armature coils BUSA NEUT 173 55870000 005 095 0005BUSB NEUT 180 54500000004 095 0005BUSC NEUT 1 154 103399999 C Rover coils 075 0004 1169 6725000001 075 0004 1 19 285 BLANK BLANK TACS BLANK BRANCH BLANK SWITCH BLANK SOURCE 2BUSMG 1 828407E 0002 3BUSMG 1 828407E 0002 VA VB VC BLANK OUTPUT BLANK PLOT BEGIN NEW DATA case BLANK ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 119 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Advanced Manual 5 3 Usage of the Library and library reference objects Exa_5 cir This example shows how ATPDraw can be used efficiently by a professional ATP user The ATP expert simply creates the required ATP file for a power system which is often already available outside of ATPDraw and then builds a simple ATPDraw case where the power system
76. 0 0 0 A242 T138E 17 0 0 0 0 A 2421 138E 17 Cree 0 wily a LLUSG 87 07085746858 S26d lt 51810 05593 02445 SVINTAGE 0O SUNITS la USE RL CaS SS Se lt lt case separator gt gt gt ees ss SEOF User supplied header cards follow 07 Sep 98 17 19 10 ARG HVBUSA HVBUSB HVBUSC LVBUSA LVBUSB LVBUSC TVBUSA TVBUSB TVBUSC This file is very similar to the DBM input file but with a different header and with the DBM file header given at the bottom instead This file will be Included in the ATP file by ATPDraw It is suggested to give this file a name with extension LIB and store it in the USP directory The name LINTR400 LIB is used in this example 5 8 3 Creating support file When the library file from the DBM file has been created the next step is to create a New User Specified object So start up ATPDraw and enter the Objects field in the main menu The process of creating a new object consists of two steps creating parameter support and creating an icon First select the New User Specified field in the popup menu You must specify the number of data and nodes of the new object Since no NUM card exists in the DBM header the Number of data is 0 in this example The Number of nodes is set to 3 as shown in Fig 5 38 New user object Ed Number of data 0 OR Number of nodes Help Fig 5 38 Size of the new BCTRAN object When the user has determined the size of the new object and clicks OK a notebook style d
77. 0 4000 3000 2000 1000 1000 2000 3000 0 100 200 300 400 T ms Fig 5 24 SLG fault and fault clearing transients simulation Fig 5 25 SLG fault and fault dean transients P ed ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 141 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Advanced Manual 5 6 Usage of MODELS In this chapter the usage of MODELS 4 in ATPDraw will be explained ATPDraw supports only a simplified usage of MODELS The following facilities are not included e nested models e expressions in the use statements e record of models variables The example in this chapter is taken from benchmark DC68 DAT subcase 7 The data case is a 500 kV system from Coulee to Raver with a series capacitor at Columbia The capacitors are protected with ZnO arresters and with MODELS controlled switches 5 6 1 Creating the model file ATPDraw handles the input output to the MODELS section of the ATP file and the usage of each model The actual model file describing the model must be written outside of ATPDraw The model in DC68 DAT is printed below The model has been modified a bit since it is not allowed to use expressions in the USE section of a model Instead of calculating the voltage across the arrester in the USE statement the two node voltages at each side are sent as input parameters and the difference is calculated inside the model vcap V1 V2 MODEL FLASH_1 comment KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKEK KKK KKKK KEK
78. 0 MVA 75 MVA tertiary Excitation losses 140 kW Excitation current 0 2 Short circuit losses High to Low 710 kW High to Tertiary 188 kW Low to Tertiary 159 kW Positive seq reactances High to Low 15 High to Tertiary 12 5 Low to Tertiary 7 2 The three phase three winding auto transformer has a tertiary delta winding so neither the value of the zero sequence exciting current nor the value of the zero sequence excitation loss are critical see the ATP Rule Book 3 chapter XIX C for more details Based on this data the input file for the BCTRAN supporting routine requesting A R output will be as shown below BEGIN NEW DATA CASE ACCESS MODULE BCTRAN SERASE 3 ad 0 060 230s 140 0 060 250 tas 0 3 BG 1 154 73 HVBUSALVBUSAHVBUSBLVBUSBHVBUSCLVBUSC 2 TOsadl LVBUSA LVBUSB LVBUSC 3 Los U TVBUSCTVBUSATVBUSATVBUSBTVBUSBTVBUSC I JOa L90 2x 15 0 20s 0 INE 188 ares ts 12 5 tas O Beo 139 Tied flow Toe Toa 0 1 BLANK SPUNCH BLANK BEGIN NEW DATA CASE BLANK BLANK Because the magnetizing inductance will be added to the model as an external element only the resistive component of the excitation current has been inputted here otherwise the magnetizing inductance would be taken into account twice 5 8 2 Creating a Data Base Module file for BCTRAN The first step is to create a DBM file which is an ATP file for the specific circuit along with a header explaining variables in the DBM file The ATP Rule Book 3 chapter XI
79. 00 6260205903605 5957Z290E 700 47307801542858158E 02 Os 2300B8 7OLT 133552 0n7 02 oS LILS06063741L056E703 ZeL009 621950092 7322404 pIDO4S 913322 962975 9E705 LeSl201l 75147 9043095E706 sA9D3S394300760L1 1 6COET0G 1299307910128 74115306 ALOCLTIZISETLOIOGIE O7 Led PI Z59S50 925429368707 16 S8 6772606671Z422630300E 04 slIZ0sels4aza7 57 01L0E 02 2 04652610945998876E O1 20780810434909 9690 7E 01 JULLI 162027 oe0r U 6026106016 54125239E 00 LwOO0 8220694625421 798701 eA TZO9TC4AZTSUSSSISETUZ de T LOZIZTCAU TS 62335E703 262041011 690053 60ZE702 0 3129552699 0450597E 04 ef TIITLIGA GEO 96E TUT p20 el oO Leo Je GOLE FOO 7 824930816768321060E 01 2329662373494 10976E 02 1 90 74605972253 9690E70z Zo JOZdSUSI27 367 6sET UZ 4 42352317124601609460E 02 20050660579 7040099E7023 Se LlO4I256 9095 59C09E 03 16678754042265010E 04 2 67944226558872052E 04 s 00 18 242809008 6044632225300EF 02 moO esSlOlLIOoyo4Es 02 234 VJGUTIo233LI0US ETU 63430465199159244E 02 3 09062705 76403791 6E 02 ef S1O9CTSZISIZTIIG4EtO02 Js GA 7035279 74661 205E 702 66234942279643150E 01 1 375318364301234060E 02 sOLLLSZ20 799133012 4E7701 1 0672834141432 7645E 02 el Z0UE2Z6 399665901 99E703 2 05902541118038440E 05 saa ILS 631 30538 01 324199697 5604507246E 01 09242577054224355E 01 1 20782380234957044E 00 618333 1 2745 73534E700 6 056098807947469220E 00 259910087256094549E 01 2 14714699714826374E 01 49984039582018909E 01 900 ULSIUGIZ05009E TUL 2796791051 1664267 7ET
80. 0004 TX0006 1 VC VB 2VO2MC XX0032 VS2MA VS2XXA 0001 1 VS2MB VS2XXB 0001 1 VB2MC VS52XXC 0001 1 XX0032 Le00E7 0 POSL VLINE TOU 0 POSL VLINE 8000 0 VLINE VINV Lossa 1 POSI Lg OR I 2 POSZ te00E7 2 POS2 POS1 OR 2 User specified object C ATPDRAW USP HVDC_6 SUP Angle 1 8E 0001 Rs 2 5E 0003 Cs 1 08 0002 AC VS1XXA POS POS1 NEG XX0011 Ua VS1IXXA Uc VS1XXC AQAA AAAAQAQA ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 129 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Advanced Manual SINCLUDE HVDC_6 VS1XX POS1 XX0011 VS1XXA VS1XXC 18 2 2500 01 C User specified object C ATPDRAW USP HVDC_6 SUP C Angle 1 8E 0001 C Rs 2 5E 0003 C Cs 1 0E 0002 C AC VS2XXA C POS POSZ C NEG C Ua VS2XXA C Uc VS2XXC SINCLUDE HVDC_6 VS2XX POS2 VS2XXA VS2XXC 18 2 2500 01 SWITCH C lt n 1 gt lt n 2 gt lt Tclose gt lt Top Tde gt lt Ie gt lt V CLOP gt lt type gt POS2 XX0011 MEASURING 1 SOURCE C lt n 1 gt lt gt lt Ampl gt lt Freq gt lt Phase T0 gt lt Al gt lt TA gt lt TSTART gt lt TSTOP gt 14VSA 0 187794 60 60 alle l 14VSB O 187794 60 1 80 dea 1 14VSC 0 187794 60 60 ie i 12VINV O 229660 01 BLANK TACS BLANK BRANCH BLANK SWITCH BLANK SOURCE VA VB VC VINV BLANK OUTPUT BLANK PLOT BEGIN NEW DATA CASE BLANK The part of the file marked bold TACS HYBRID BLANK TACS and POWER FREQUENCY is added to the ATP file only if the TACS and Powe
81. 0083XX0081 01 200 2 50E8 7 1 1XxX0021XxX0083 Ol 200 2 50E8 18 1 XX0018 40 0 XX0036 400 O 1XxX0091XxX0046 OL 200 272 5086 8 1 XX0018 13 005 O 1XX0095XX0091 01 200 2 50E8 7 1 XX0070 13 005 O 1XX0100XX0023 01 200 2 50E8 8 1 1XX0035XxX0095 OL 200 272 5086 18 1 1X0049AX0125A 20 400 2 40E5 008 1 00 2X0049BX0125B 2 260 2 90E5 008 1 00 3X0049CX0125C 1XX0O066TOP OL 200 2 50E8 8 1 1X0063AX0110A 20 400 2 40E5 012 1 00 2X0063BX0110B 2 260 2 90E5 012 1 00 3X0063CX0110C 1X0132AX0112A 50 650 2 40E5 015 1 00 2X0132BX0112B 10 360 2 90E5 015 1 00 3X0132CX0112C 1X0051LAXO168A 20 400 2 40E5 068 1 00 2X0051BX0168B 2 260 2 90E5 068 1 00 3X0051CX0168C 1X0115ALINE2A 20 650 2 40E5 024 1 00 2X0115BLINE2B 2 360 2 90E5 024 1 00 3X011 5CLINE2C 1X0117AX0118A 20 400 2 40E5 012 1 00 2X0117BX0118B 2 260 2 90E5 012 1 00 3X0117CX0118C 1X0119AX0120A 20 650 2 40E5 015 1 00 2X0119BX0120B 2 360 2 90E5 015 1 00 3X0119CX0120C 1X0125AX0121A 20 400 2 40E5 015 1 00 2X0125BxX0121B 2 260 2 90E5 015 1 00 3X0125CX0121C 1X0125AX0115A 20 400 2 40E5 085 1 00 2X0125BX0115B 2 260 2 90E5 085 1 00 3X0125CX0115C X0115A 0005 O X0115B 0005 O X0115C 0005 O 1X0118AX0110A 20x 650 2 40E5 022 1 00 2X0118BX0110B 2 360 2 90E5 022 1 00 3X0118CX0110C 1X0110AX0132A 20 650 2 40E5 022 1 00 2X0110BX0132B 2 360 2 90E5 02
82. 03 Le67 72691369645 25L1ETOS 13 Pe4ZTIIZ7 495383698 3200E 04 12419530770738760E 02 2122000 L93600 050 SETUL 15264403892287071E 01 4 71240893706049463E 02 025727209008442160E 04 1243395452398 97352E 704 wOSZ01L S63 72251 7 002ZET09 LelOG519e0 224 36228709 pl4s97S221 19946 7 90Et09 71050503746044758E 00 4 78035106832746260E 03 w22431840 7696 13952E703 1 910950334256450160E 04 0506078676095843554E 05 24 5002 55 LS 20000340 JE TOS so2202 99013048 660GE705 9 SOLOS LICUGICOSSVETOS 0 00 2 2444060084036455700E 02 31371202247750279E 02 24204501 2919676411 E02 s3994 1 OOO 13454 56E4 02 lI S63999954e129S96E701 lLZULZ650363901364E701 41 309094008195 939E 03 2186093466011934307E 04 ZOlllezloze 729992 E 01 62029362012544720E O01 372797472950960044E 00 212050600 7506012 7ET01 lt o6006624 L7 1656 l60E707 L930 LIZ46639S92 1 4E 03 vA LOTLO T94 7 OUTUIIOUE TUS Tesi LIES I TEI 7 2h703 T9 7 4852412429643596900E 04 ATPDraw version 1 for Windows Advanced Manual 21 SOLOLEZ9IL362205E 04 0254507 99959904 7CE 0Z2 405650953107 4655E703 0 Z134687861937320E 04 pLOTS9TeSsZ0eZz1USOLETOG 25495139350984991E 06 s2934 0025429421 65E 07 s03 oO O200296510 fE 0 3642438007043920E O01 056127036082514742E 00 S09ZO8C 1 49coZ0773E 01 11240321074656277E 03 30745289484094538E 04 I 160401170933233 78E 06 s303924960308926 3308E 06 voLL35 26ULS069Z99E O 14550427345624384E 01 873604165349635848E O1 95284062
83. 0C CR20A CR20B CRZUC CRZI1A CRZ1B CRALC ml ml 300 LoUis oO OL Ol gt lt L gt lt A CC B gt lt Leng gt lt gt lt gt 0Q 20 ige PEs 14 es 93 4 9344 93 4 DDD 2 1 4750000000000000E 0005 1 0000000000000000E 0000 0 0000000000000000EF 0000 ATPDraw version 1 for Windows rrFRrROO OO 148 ATPDraw SINCLUDE CR25A CR25B CR25C CR25A CR25B CR25G 51CR20A 52CR20B S3CRZ0C CR20A CR20B CR20C CR20A CR20B CRZ0C CROI1A CROI1B CRUIC 51Xx0064AX0083A 52X0064BX0083B 53X0064CX0083C XxX0083AX0068A X0083BX0068B X0083CX0068C x0069AX0017A X0069BX0017B X0069CX0017C x0079AX0068A X0079BX0068B XOO79CXO068C XOO079AX0068A X0079BX0068B XO079CXO0068C 51GRCBA 9ZGRCBB 53GRCBC 51GRCBA 92GRCBB 33GRCBC SRC2A SRC2B SRC2C SRC2A SRC2B SRCZC 51X0068AX0095A 52X0068BX0095B 53X0068CX0095C BRANCH 92CRZ1A CR20A for Windows version 1 0 C ATPDRWN2 USP ZNO_1 LIB 92X0017BX0068BX0017AX0068A 92X0017CX0068CX0017AX0068A 200 200 200 OL IL ad 200 200 200 J90 Loz Advanced Manual 995 rele oe 223 23 23 9 36 14 Ida 93 4 93 4 93 4 223 23 23 Ta IO ee ens 1 4750000000000000E 0005 1 0000000000000000E 0000 0 0000000000000000F 0000 SINCLUDE SWITCH C lt nm 1 gt lt nm 2 gt lt Tcelose gt lt Top Tde gt lt iO LO 120K il il i RAVBA RAVBB RAVBC CR30A CR30B CR30C 13CR30A 13CR30B
84. 2 1 00 3X0110CX0132C BRANCH 99 SICC 1100 1 1 1 0000000E O001 6 5000000E 0002 1 0000000EK 0000 7 6000000E 0002 2 0000000E 0000 8 0000000E 0002 4 0000000E 0000 8 3400000K 0002 5 0000000E 0000 8 4400000E 0002 1 0000000EK 0001 9 3500000E 0002 2 0000000E 0001 1 0820000E 0003 3 Q0Q000000EFE 0001 1 2000000E 0003 9999 1X0025AX0136A 20 400 2 40E5 068 1 00 2X0025BX0136B 2 260 2 90E5 068 1 00 3X0025CX0136C 1X0137AX0132A 20 400 2 40E5 012 1 00 2X0137BX0132B 2 260 2 90E5 012 1 00 3X0137CX0132C 1X0139ATR400A 20 650 2 40E5 017 1 00 2X0139BTR400B 2 360 2 90E5 017 1 00 3X0139CTR400C ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 153 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Advanced Manual 1X0136AX0141A 20 400 2 40F5 025 1 00 2X0136BX0141B 2 260 2 90F5 025 1 00 3X0136CxX0141Cc BRANCH 99 SICB 1100 3 I 1 1 0000000E 0001 6 5000000E 0002 1 0000000E 0000 7 6000000K 0002 2 0000000F 0000 8 0000000EF 0002 4 0000000K 0000 8 3400000F 0002 5 0000000E 0000 8 4400000F 0002 1 0000000E 0001 9 3500000K 0002 2 0000000F 0001 1 0820000F 0003 3 0000000E 0001 1 2000000F 0003 9999 PLA LINELLA 20 650 2 40F5 024 1 00 2PT1B LINEI1B 2 360 2 90F5 024 1 00 SPriC GINEIC 1X0149AX0120A 20 400 2 40F5 012 1 00 2X0149BxX0120B 2 260 2 90F5 012 1 00 3X0149Cx0120C 1X0168AX0151A 20 400 2 40F5 015 1 00 2X0168BX0151B 2 260 2 90F5 015 1 00 3X0168CX0151C TR400A 003 0 TR400B 003 0 TR400C 003 0 1X0136AX0139A
85. 20 650 2 40F5 051 1 00 2X0136BX0139B 2 360 2 90F5 051 1 00 3X0136CX0139C 1SICA xX0139A 20 400 2 4085 007 1 00 2SICB X0139B 2 260 2 90F5 007 1 00 3SICC x0139C BRANCH 99 SICA L100 ile 1 1 0000000E 0001 6 5000000E 0002 1 0000000E 0000 7 6000000E 0002 2 0000000E 0000 8 0000000EF 0002 4 0000000E 0000 8 3400000E 0002 5 0000000E 0000 8 4400000F 0002 1 0000000EF 0001 9 3500000K 0002 2 0000000F 0001 1 0820000F 0003 3 0000000E 0001 1 2000000F 0003 9999 X0163AX0164A 1 50 0 X0163BX0164B 1 50 0 X0163CX0164C 1 50 0 1XX0078XX0066 01 200 2 50EK8 he 1X0168APTIA 20 400 2 40E5 085 1 00 2X0168BPT1B 2 260 2 90F5 085 1 00 3X0168CPTI1C PETIA 0005 0 PT1B 0005 0 PTIC 0005 0 1 X01 20AX01104 20 650 2 40E5 022 1 00 2X0120BX0118B 2 360 2 90F5 022 1 00 3X0120CxX0118C 1XX0178XxX0078 01 200 2 50E8 13 1 XX0032 Aid 0 XX0032 13 005 0 1XX0184xXx0100 01 200 2 50E8 Te l 1x 0186XxX0184 01 200 2 50EK8 1 1 XX0186 4s 0 XX0186 13 005 0 XX0178 13 005 0 XX0178 40s 0 1LINE2AX0163A 20 650 2 40E5 34 1 00 2LINE2BX0163B 2 360 2 90E5 3 1 00 3LINE2CX0163C C User specified object C ATPDRAW USP LCC_N4 SUP C IN1 X0009A C IN2_ A XX0010 ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 154 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Advanced Manual C OUTL XO0LIA C OUT2_A XX0012 SINCLUDE C_400KV X0009A z XX0012 User specified object C IN1 TWR4A IN2_A TOP C C C C OUT1 X0044A
86. 3 6 6 8 9 KBEG 2 3 32 9 sos D 3 FV 3 2 J a a 2 3 Fs 2 y KEND 14 8 814 8 14 814 814 8 814 8 814 814 8 8 14 Rime L L L2 2 ft tft 12 tft tr 1 2 2 11 L oa ot 4 1 1 SERASE CC lt tt tt gt Cards punched by Support routine on UG Ssep 9s 20 02 21 lt fetttt gt C ACCESS MODULE BCTRAN C SERASE CG 3 Os 0 060 Aos 140 0 060 200 140 0 3 3 C 1 154 73 HVBUSALVBUSAHVBUSBLVBUSBHVBUSCLVBUSC C 2 TOAL LVBUSA LVBUSB LVBUSC C 3 18 0 TVBUSCTVBUSATVBUSATVBUSBTVBUSBTVBUSC Go LA TLO Load caste L50 Zoos O I CG a Loos Lass Toas Laaa Tos U 1 CG 2 s Hehe a Taz Tos Vee Jae 0 1 C BLANK SVINTAGE 1 LEVBUSCTVBUSA 6942 8363020897 2 TVBUSATVBUSB 0 0 6942 8363020897 ST VBUSBIVBUSC 0 0 0 0 6942 3363020897 USE AR LHVBUSALVYBUSA Tess d COG S994 92 399310761130933 2LVBUSA 1Oe105 G00 Aag 0 0 52 452809134348 05405278589067 3TVBUSCTVBUSA S400 7 LL 7710S 76 0 0 87 07085746858 0 0 338 51816785593 02445984 4HVBUSBLVBUSB 0 0 0 0 U0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Fea2 1090539452 259310701 130035 SLVBUSB 0 0 0 0 Q0 1 0 0 0 0 15 70576584821 Oa0 52 452809134348 05405278589067 6 VBUSATVBUSBE 0 0 0 0 O20 0 0 42421 L38E 17 0 0 S 507 L177 1904576 0 0 8 7 070857460858 0 0 338 51L816785593 02445984 ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 158 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Advanced Manual 7THVBUSCLVBUSC wd ODOD 39402 93310701130 SLVBUSC OOOO O ROO COO CO OOO OO ON OO OO OO O l 9s 70376584821 52 452809134348 05405278589 9TVBUSBTVBUSC 0
87. 460513610E 01 9966043407609419609E 03 wh 1 SO G34089209 L0EFU 19646401465681536E 02 OL S46e2661255236 7E 02 3292467420 643216046E 03 40193598424134689E 03 03919613417938527E 04 AOS 102 LT IAG 222Z 554 02 sUS699254 24083 LQ0ET02 280596647 1LOS29C61LIEFOZ 68492111064738502E 01 0764 7691919 S350 55E703 OGLIIO9ZZ0 7160 739ETOG MOLILI4Z1 57 Tle6 2L0E 01 0786301 2470610 72Z0E 00 682497094 2598237E 00 oOooS LIL Soo 20S TAS ETU p60 LSL6soZolJoZz C9ETO3 612644312401 545374E 06 3847763313030584E 01 cJILOIOGZ6e0 30070 ETUA 9499133744513556 TETOG 221 8US36662 12 2600Z5E 709 spol Ieee S427 39005F 702 wlLOolelZsZ239540030E705 30474419322799310E 05 s900900241973302502BEF05 133346384594222 7T64E 03 196432 7 60409119836E 02 629444146046835015E 01 2230627 74438542834 E 02 tZ AZOLO SS S993 IETU 03845444837157648E 04 Z01L1T1183092964269E 01 t1154769164744520E 00 28893460154047546E 00 47900803374305739E 01 e203 LAOOL547 9962 2h 702 ef1 42391394207 769Z0E 04 133 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Advanced Manual 4 06697Z226028513836E 03 34964071 5050503 9152E 02 4 87274752414044255E 00 5 16090318045150820E 00 5 6 76001306365 16e26E700 Asa Joo UO LEIUZ2Z 3267 5E 00 1286 6560260440 75s26E 701 3 40955023404691673E 01 S 40US31lebg7Z05665636E702Z Ze lLO402 192029790291 EOS T8918 0981868 Se 986GGCGEF0F 2 252505005UL2 log Z6o5nr0Z 1 81349636745061056E 05 LeleeyssZlecelyZz24as5b705 5 14441140087258
88. 62 TACS type Sample and track 88 98 or 99 inst_min max 63 DEVICE63 TACS type Instantaneous min max 88 98 or 99 min max_track 64 DEVICE64 TACS type Min max tracking 88 98 or 99 acc_count 65 DEVICE65 TACS type Accumulator and counter 88 98 or 99 rms meter 66 DEVICE66 TACS type RMS value of signal 88 98 or 99 Initial Cond The initial condition of TACS variables could be set by the INIT_T object found in the Initial cond menu under TACS The INIT_T icon is shown here MT 4 2 9 12 User Specified The User Specified menu has four items Library Ret 1 ph Ref 3 ph Files Fig 4 52 Supported user specified objects ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 102 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Reference Manual Library Selecting the Library item will draw the predefined user specified object LIB This object has no data and no nodes Using this object in a circuit will result just in a Include statement in the ATP file The user must keep track of internal node names in the include file The name and the path of the file can be specified in the User specified section at the bottom of the component dialog box Ref 1 ph Selecting Ref 1 ph will draw the object LIBREF_1 This object is a dummy object REF that is not written to the ATP file Its purpose is just to visualize a connection inside a e g LIB object The object is single phase one Ref 3 ph Selecting Ref 3 ph
89. 828E 05 1 43233527443105126E 09 1 44639603189362073E 09 6 J3615268340194206863E708 H 2292509005073 2516E706 L 403425950092Z12626E700 les 2OlLIs700 302269 LEO 1 74588746092735595E 03 L65938 149732850501 SET02 201243656 20999360 7270s 326076590 509957 00GE7O0S 32676004267 76633C63ER 703 1 11439047359345896E 04 Ze 193385390066 900SS5E1 04 4 53906408949455509E 04 lepooe ll ZoUlLso eco E TOS 4 85035764955933847E 05 4 03 56200591022 7O00E 05 7 833884604155936265E 05 1 334689563360463523E 06 3 822875379602081144E 06 326200 262500004267 1E 06 4 46413234689150751E 06 4 46859647923839652E 06 UaotlLSS2il Us7071067 8 U 41764016 0 00000000 0 00000000 0 00000000 0 58881414 0 Q00000000 0 806096147 0 00000000 0 00000000 Q 00000000 UwotlLos2i1 0 70710678 0 41762016 0 00000000 0 00000000 Q 00000000 5 5 2 Creating new Overhead Line PCH objects The punch file created by a JMarti setup ATP simulation needs to be converted to a Data Base Module library file This is done automatically by ATPDraw if you choose a PCH file in the Open Punch File dialog box appearing when you click on the Overhead Line PCH option in the component selection menu In this example electrical parameters of the 500 kV transmission line are described in the JMARTI_1 PCH file Selecting this file from the list ATPDraw interprets the format and creates a LIB file with the same name as the PCH file The results of the interpretation are reported to the user in dialog bo
90. 9 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Introductory Manual Again an explanation of the input parameters is given in a help file Press the HELP button to see this help file The numerical values of the diode are all zero meaning that the diode is ideal and is open during the steady state The RLC branch in Fig 3 14 has been given a resistance of 33 Q and a capacitance of uF You have now given data to the diode and the RLC branch and instead of repeating the drawing and data giving process four times you can use the copy facility First you have to select a group of components This can be done by selecting Edit Select group field in the main menu or with a double click with the left mouse button on an empty space of the Circuit window Then cursor style changes to a pointing hand and the action mode is EDIT GROUP The process is then to click with the left mouse button to create a corner in a fence and to click the right button to enclose the fence polygon All components having their center inside the fence are included in the group Alternative way of group selection is to draw a rectangle around the objects by a left mouse click and hold at the upper left corner of the desired rectangle and moving thereafter to the lower right corner Objects inside the rectangle become a group when the mouse button 1s released al Fig 3 15 Drawing a polygon First double click on white space click the left mouse button at each corner o
91. AC___ RAMP1_ COMP1_ DUM DCMP1_ DLY60D This file is very similar to your DBM file but with a different header and with the DBM file header given at the bottom instead This file will be Included in the ATP file by ATPDraw You must give this file a name with extension LIB and store it in the USP directory The name HVDC_6 LIB is used here as an example 5 4 2 Creating a new User Specified ATPDraw object When the punch file from the DBM file has been created the next step is to create a New User Specified object So start up ATPDraw and enter the Objects field in the main menu The process of creating a new object consists of two steps a Create parameter support and b Create icon 5 4 2 1 Creating parameter support First select the New User Specified field in the popup menu A window shown in Fig 5 10 appears where you must specify the number of data and nodes of the new object The required size of the ATPDraw object is found in the header of the DBM file The number of arguments on the NUM card s tells you the Number of data which is 3 in this example The number of arguments on the ARG card s tells you the total number of arguments which in this case is 8 The Number of nodes thus in this example is set to 5 When the user has determined the size of the new object E deta OK based on the Data Base Module DBM file header and clicks OK a notebook style dialog box as the one shown in Number of nodes Hep Fig 4 20 appears
92. AO a ta BOs 30 C 0 wo 2 61 4 386 sal 983 903 C 0 co 2 61 4 300 Laed 90 3 vps ee C BLANK CARD ENDING CONDUCTOR CARDS 100 S000 1 138 1 1 G LOD 60 1 13G 1 1 C LOU el 1 138 1 9 10 1 0 G C G 0 0 O 0 C 0 a 0 1 3 l 2 0400 ee a 24 4 74835460645741773800E 02 ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 132 NO 09 NMNOrFNOFRBRrRFUOUNN BEF WOMWMOFWANEFNN NWN PWwWNNAIRFPWAINNDON UF FE KE ODF WAN J N N WE ND rFPN AFWONN gt AIFWONF NW ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 04123533031350529E 04 8 7793304821547328 3E t05 20 A 9433612209024343 3EF02 00 706963248312436 EF02 286805096014660452E 02 43215003806123378E 02 099052010009009 I5EFU3 24129379505568464E 06 6 259294 7634 900C6L5E 01 A530 a LI oS 3 00 LI OUUETOU I OLISCIZI0G0Z IO EFU eldiZot lA To eoa 52208701 waADT 2622 ILIGI TCoIETOg 46475868553182500E 03 086148430216069332E 06 WwAINDFRFWENBE OD W No O1L93 791242139141 7E 02 Z2 31271240199659422E 04 sD O0CLZSOS0 7725 ook TZ 1 57786715004263443E 02 92718142213451842E 02 3069169 79107714603 E402 84974602951421639H 03 2 316376263364552Z05E704 4072625095565 7106ET05 Poel FT GOI01L1T ST 7112601 EUS oD 7864050933 77 LOGETOG LetiSoI2LOSoLTIS06CS 7E 07 2oULl OS leg oeodl 3106 Lweord e020 97 9760L507E 0 7 C0032 76005390 78S 78EF07 1 92913450047414551E 07 84904979620343335E 01 4 f 269 PL1L 3362071 653H 01 05449950994055608E O1 Lw0934176L2620Z20467E700 2091545763414 74009E
93. ATPDraw Options dialog enables you to specify the contents of the initialization file without having to load and edit the file from a text editor As shown on Fig 4 29 it has four sub pages General Preferences Directories and View ATP ATPDraw version 1 for Windows U7 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Reference Manual ATPDOraw Options xX General Preferences Directories View ATP Circuit tiles Autosave every E minutes M Create backup files View menu M Save toolbar state M Save status bar state Save comment state Openfsave dialog Frogram Windows 3 1 style Save options on exit Window options M Save window size and position Save window s current state Fig 4 29 Customizing program options Save Load Apply Help General The General tab specifies the circuit file and ATPDraw main window options The following table lists and describes the available options Option Description Autosave every Saves all modified circuits to a separate disk file every minutes specified interval of minutes The file name is the same as the circuit file but with extension ci The circuit s modified state does not change as a consequence of an autosave operation Create backup Changes the extension of the original circuit file to ci files each time the circuit is saved This option does not apply to autosave operations Save window size Records the current si
94. AX0149A la 1 001 X0151BX0149B la 1 001 XO1SLCKOTA9oC lee L ZOOL SOURCE C lt n 1 gt lt gt lt Ampl gt lt Freq gt lt Phase T0 gt lt A1 z 15XX0036 1 LOO 000002 00005 oF 14X0164A 0 350 50 14X0164B 0 330 SOx 120 14X0164C 0 s 50 120 BLANK BRANCH BLANK SWITCH BLANK SOURCE gt s0002 I d i LINELALINELBLINELCTWR4A TWR4B TWR4C TR400ATR400BTR400CPTIA PTIB PTIC BLANK OUTPUT BLANK PLOT BEGIN NEW DATA CASE BLANK ATPDraw version 1 for Windows S 8 S 8 ODODDODODOADOADOONNN EK V erer 155 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Advanced Manual In Fig 5 37 results from the simulation are displayed The blue thick line shows the voltage at the transformer terminal while the red thin lines are the incoming voltage measured at the substation entrance and the discharge current of the arrester U kV KA 4 LINE1A 10 TR400A 19 SICA 1500 1000 _ ROMP a 500 i a 100 I arrester 1000 0 5 10 15 20 25 T us Fig 5 37 ATP simulation results 5 8 Simulating transformer inrush currents This example shows how to create an ATP input file which can be used in development of controlled switching to reduce the inrush current of large power transformers substantially In such kind of studies the magnetic coupling between transformer windings and the nonlinear behavior of the magnetizing reactance are the main influencing parameters so th
95. A_10 CIR The 400 kV supply is represented by lumped RLC branches The external library file LINTR400 LIB created using Data Base Module feature of ATP is Included in this example The 3 phase parallel connected time controlled switches are applied to simulate the steady on off on operating cycle of the circuit breaker The TACS transfer function objects are used as flux sensors in this example It must be noted that such a generalized transfer objects are available only in version 1 2 and above of ATPDraw So if you have and older version of the program you must replace them by the older G s blocks The magnetizing branch is represented by a hysteretic nonlinear inductor model generated by the HYSDAT supporting routine of ATP At present ATP supports only one type Armco M4 of magnetic material but it could be used as good enough approximation for other oriented silicon steel materials too Fig 5 43 shows the hysteresis loop of the Type 1 material of ATP and of the magnetic core of the transformer investigated in this study ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 161 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Advanced Manual Fig 5 43 The shape of the hysteresis loop of the transformer The output file generated by the HYSDAT supporting routine is listed below In this example the file is given a name HYSTR400 1L1B and stored in the USP folder C lt gt Cards punched by support routine on OQo Sep 9e 18 19 25 l
96. Autalnit DC 8 Man Irit 5M 1 Autolnit aM 1 Man Init Fig 4 48 Supported electric machine alternatives ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 95 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Reference Manual The Synchronous machine models in ATPDraw have the following features limitation With and without TACS control Manufacturers data No saturation No eddy current or damping coils Single mass The Universal machine models in ATPDraw have the following features limitation Manual and automatic initialization SM IM and DC type supported Raw coil data internal parameters Saturation One single excitation coil in each axis d q Network option for mechanical torque only Single torque source The popup menu under Machines contains the following items SM 590 TACS SM59_NC eo MACHINE Synchronous machine No TACS type 59 control 3 phase armature SM 598 TACS SMS59_FC Be MACHINE Synchronous machine Max 8 type 59 TACS control 3 phase armature IM 3 Autolnit IMAI UM MACHINE Induction machine Automatic type 3 initialization 3 phase armature IM 3 Man JInit IM_3MI UM MACHINE Induction machine Manual type 3 initialization 3 phase armature DC 8 Autolnit DC_8AI l 6 UM MACHINE DC machine Automatic type 8 initialization 1 phase armature DC 8 Man Init DC_8MI i By UM MACHINE_ DC machine Manual type 8 initialization 1 phase armature SM 1 AutoInit SM_IAI owe UM MACHINE Synchronous
97. C S OUT2_A XX0045 INCLUDE C_400KV TWR4A XX0045 User specified object C IN1 X0044A IN2_A XX0045 C C C C OUT1 X0054A d S OUTZ_ A XX0055 INCLUDE C_400KV X0044A z XX00535 C User specified object C C IN1 X0054A C IN2_ A XX0055 C OUTI LINEA C OUT2_A XX0046 SINCLUDE C_400KV X0054A XX0046 User specified object C IN1 X00114 IN2_ A XX0012 C g C C OUT1 TWR4A 2 S OUT2_A TOP INCLUDE C_400KV X0011A TOPH C JMarti C User specified object C IN1 X0039A C IN2_A XX0023 C C X0009B X0009C xXX00L0 ATPDRAW USP LCC_N4 SUP TWR4B TWR4C TOP H ATPDRAW USP LCC_N4 SUP X0044B X0O044C XX0045 ATPDRAW USP LCC_N4 SUP XO054B X0054C XX0055 ATPDRAW USP LCC_N4 SUP KOULIB UOLC AXUULZ ATPDRAW USP LCC_N4 SUP x0011A X0011B XOO11C x0044A X0044B X0044C XOO54A X0054B X0054C LINELA LINEI1B LINE1C TWR4A TWR4BH TWR4C XOOQOOQ9A XO009B XO009C T1 gt lt TSTART gt lt TSTOP OUT1 X0009A OUT2_A XX0010 INCLUDE C_400KV X0039A X0039B X0039C XX0023 X0010 SWITCH C lt n 12 gt n 2 gt lt Tolose gt lt Top Tde gt lt Ie gt lt Vf CLOP gt lt type XX0036TOP MEASURING XX0078TWR4C se 1870 XX0066TWR4A i 1870 XX0078TWR4B L 1870 X0121AX0117A la 1 001 X0121BX0117B ele 1 001 X0121CX0117C la 1 001 X0141AX0137A 1 1 001 X0141BX0137B eet ee 1 001 X0141CX0137C ele 1 001 X0151
98. Draw Web page is maintained at address http www ee mtu edu atp atpdraw ATPDraw html 2 9 Running ATP and other utilities from ATPDraw in version 1 2 and above The new Edit batch jobs feature of ATPDraw supports to add users own external commands e g Run ATP Run LCC Run TPPlot Run PCPlot Run PlotXY Run PL42mat etc to the existing options under the A7P main menu Using this feature you are requested to specify the name of the batch or executable file and the name of the file which is sent as parameter e g ATP BAT lt current atp file gt or plotxy exe lt current pl4 file gt You can save these settings into the ATPDraw ini file as well using the Tools Save Options This new feature makes it possible to use ATPDraw as the center of a powerful simulation environment i e from which other components pre and post processors supporting programs and utilities of the ATP package are launched 2 9 1 How to run ATP directly from ATPDraw First you must have ATP installed and configured properly To ensure the smooth interaction between ATPDraw and ATP specify the ATPDIR Salford ATP and or WATDIR Watcom ATP environmental variable settings in your AUTOEXEC BAT i e SET ATPDIR Drive Path Salford ATP_program_directory and or SET WATDIR Drive Path Watcom ATP_program_directory Then create a Run ATP command using the ATP Edit batch jobs submenu by selecting the current ATP as Parameter and Drive Path ATP BAT as
99. I0 30 Z aopa 05215 4 R a aires ares E anbe 05215 4 1 6 0Z aes Tilea Taa 3 364 05215 4 L602 Go Pe Suip a 3 364 05215 4 1 602 aUa To IO cup 0 me 2 61 4 OO cll Are esa oO SD O Te 2 61 4 306 L232 20S 2062 BLANK CARD ENDING CONDUCTOR CARDS LO 5000 1 es oa 1 1 LOO 60 1 13 Ox 1 1 TOU iO 1 Iiei L 9 10 1 0 BLANK CARD ENDING FREQUENCY CARDS BLANK CARD ENDING LINE CONSTANT O 0 O 0 O T 30 1 L 0 ao 30 il 1 0 SPUNCH BLANK JMARTI BEGIN NEW DATA CASE BLANK CARD The optional BRANCH request cards are not supported in the present version of ATP_LCC However no such card is needed because ATPDraw will specify branches with 6 characters long node names beginning with IN OUT__ and having A B and C at the end Running this file through ATP will produce the punch file printed below JMARTI_1 PCH which is not really suitable for human reading but ATPDraw is able to interpret this file and to create a corresponding Data Base Module LIB file from it as shown next lt tr gt Cards punched Dy Support routine om 30 June 98 Lis4l 29 P FFFS xx x UNTRANSPOSED JMARTI line segment JMARTI SETUP BLANK CARD ENDING FREQUENCY CARDS BLANK CARD ENDING LINE CONSTANT C G C C SERASE C LINE CONSTANTS C ENGLISH C 1 364 05215 4 LeGO02 20x Ta ay 30 b 1 364 05215 4 LeG02 s IUa O06 C 2 2904 wODZLS A 1 602 ail ae Eo Trsa Tie C a s30 05215 4 Lao na eo Ties Trsa C 3 364 05215 4 1 602 Leo aU BOs C 3 3604 05215 4 La GOZ C
100. KMODE Modal quantities will be calculated L if checked L matrix will be calculated w L if checked L matrix will be calculated Always output of R specifies IZFLAG C if selected C matrix will be calculated w C if selected O C matrix will be calculated Always output of R specifies IZFLAG SPUNCH checked enables PUNCH output If both PI and J Marti are unchecked a KCLee output is created PI when selected equivalent PI circuit will be calculated NPAIS Number of major PI sections XMAJOR Length of each major section m CNAME One character to distinguish line sections J Marti when selelected JMarti line model will be generated Freqss Frequency at which the steady state values should be calculated Fregqinit Initial frequency of the logarithmic frequency looping Dist Length of the overhead line Default fitting Recommended for inexperienced users Idebug diagnostic printout flag TPunch lt punch branch cards Koutpr visibility of JMarti input data card interpretation SKIP Gmode phase to ground conductance Default 3e 8 mhos km Zc NexMis Different fitting normally blank Normax gt 0 EpsTol fitting tolerance NorMax maximum order default 30 TeCode on off accuracy based on EpsTol or based on order lt NorMax TfWta on output of fitting comparing rational approx and theory ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 182 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Line Cable Manual
101. L3SCR30C CROI1A CROI1B CROIC CR50A CRSUB CRUG CRZ2A CRZ2B CRA2C CR25A CRZ 5B CRZ5C GRCBA GRCBB GRCBC RAVBA X0064A RAVBB X0064B RAVBC X0064C x0083AX0069A XO083BX0069B SUVS SZCROUGIC x0083AX0079A X0083BX0079B XOSA XOUV 9c xX0095AGRCBA X0095BGRCBB AUOISCGREBC CR20A l la La la la la 0 006 U s006 U 00G Sia la L la La la La la l la l L sULJ98 ATPDraw version 1 for Windows C ATPDRWN2 USP ZNO_1 LIB 92CRZ1B CR20B CRZ1A CR20A 92CRZ1C CR20C CRZ1A CR20A 10 10 LO 10 LO 10 10 LO 10 LO 10 TOs ii JODO Se ens eS Te gt lt Vf CLOP gt lt GAPA GAPB GAPC oOoo0o0o0oo0ooo O O0Oo0o0o0o0oo0oo0oo0oo0oo0oO0O O Oo0o0o0o000O0O000O0OO000O0OO0OO0OO0OO0OO0OO0OO0 OO O 149 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Advanced Manual SOURCE Cs fm Lasa Amp 14SRC1A 0 440000 14SRC1C 0 440000 14SRC1B 0 440000 IASRCOR Q 440000 14SRC2C 0 440000 14SRC2B 0 440000 BLANK BRANCH BLANK SWITCH BLANK SOURCE BLANK OUTPUT PRINTER PLOT 194 5 0 0 40 BLANK PLOT BEGIN NEW DATA CASE BLANK gt lt Freq CR25A CR30A OU O04 6U 60 60 oU gt lt Phase TO gt lt 20 140 100 al Os beh gt lt TSTART gt lt TSTOP gt a 10 3 zda LO Sis IO la 10 ae TO a 10 s 5 7 Lightning overvoltage studies in a 400 kV substation Exa_9 cir This example demonstrates how to use ATPDraw effect
102. LIO ti Ss Fig 4 40 Supported linear branch elements There is a Help button in each component s dialog box that invokes the Help Viewer with description of the meaning of parameters and gives a reference to the corresponding ATP Rule Book chapter Fig 4 41 b shows the help information associated with the ordinary RLC branch as an example ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 87 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Reference Manual Resistor RESISTOR saa BRANCH Pure resistance in Q type 0 Capacitor CAPACITO BRANCH Pure capacitance in uF if Copt 0 type 0 Inductor INDUCTOR BRANCH Pure inductance in mH if Xopt 0 type 0 RLC RLC BRANCH R L and C in series type 0 RLC 3 ph REG BRANCH 3 phase R L and C in series type 0 Symmetric 3 phase nodes RLC 3x3 ph RUG oxo BRANCH 3 phase R L and C in series 5 type 0 Non symmetric 3 phase nodes C U 0 CAP UQ A BRANCH Capacitor with initial condition i initial condition L 0 IND_IO An BRANCH Inductor with initial condition initial condition Component RLC x Attributes MODE PHASE NAME From 1 BEG To i END Group No fo Label JRLC Comment gt ingle phase ALC branch Output T Hide C Current C Voltage Cur amp olt C Power amp Energy Lock OF Cancel Help Fig 4 41 a Input dialog box for RLC branches ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 88 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Reference Manual File Edit Character
103. Length of overhead line Freq Frequency at which the transformation matrix is calculated Freq ss Frequency at which the steady state values are calculated Freq Init Initial frequency of the logarithmic frequency looping Metric English Switching between the Metric and English unit High accuracy FCAR If button is checked highest accuracy is used in Carson s formulas Seg ground Segmented ground wires If button is unchecked then the ground wires are assumed to be continuously grounded Transposed The overhead line is transposed if button is checked Real Complex matrix TR Real matrix The eigenvectors of the transformation matrix are rotated closer to the real axis Complex matrix Full complex transformation matrix will be used DEC Number of decades in the logarithmic frequency loop PNTs Number of frequency points per decade ATP Draw version 1 for Windows 177 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Line Cable Manual Default fitting when unselected the default values are used otherwise ZC Al NexMis Different fitting normally blank Normax gt 0 EpsTol fitting tolerance NorMax maximum order default 30 TeCode off accuracy based on EpsTol on accuracy based on order lt NorMax TfWta on output of fitting comparing rational approximation and theory TfPlot on character plot of fitting as above IfDat on output OF transmission circuit parameters as function of frequency
104. M card lists all the dummy or local variables These are typically internal node names ATP gives them a unique node name and thus let you use the same DBM several times in a data case avoiding node name conflicts The rest of the DBM file describes the rectifier bridge in a normal ATP way Sorting by cards must be used in a special way 1 e TACS BRANCH SWITCH etc cards are required but no BLANK TACS BLANK BRANCH etc indicators are needed Running this DBM module file through ATP will produce a PCH punch file shown below the comment cards are removed KARD 3 4 5 6 6 6 7 7 8 8 8 9 9 14 14 14 15 15 15 16 16 16 17 17 17 18 24 24 OA 25 25 25 25 26 26 26 26 27 27 Si 32 32 32 33 32 33 34 34 34 35 35 35 KARG 20 4 5 4 5 16 16 17 6 17 18 18 19 4 5 20 5 6 20 1 2 10 2 3 11 3 2 7 8 1 i 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 i 10 1 2 12 1 2 14 1 3 13 1 3 15 KBEG 3 3 31219 3 69 3 20 13 3 12 3 12 3 69 12 3 69 13 25 3 13 25 3 13 3 27 39 9 21 315 9 21 3 15 3 21 65 3 965 3 965 9 3 65 9 3 65 KEND 8 8 817 24 8 74 825 18 8 17 8 17 8 74 17 8 74 18 30 8 18 30 8 18 8 32 44 13 25 8 20 13 25 8 20 7 25 70 7 14 70 7 14 70 13 8 70 13 B 70 KTEX 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 Ct tf 2 kt kt a S ta E a Lo Ott tt 2 amp 2 tt tt a Ce ae ft tet tt et et 2 i SERASE TACS 11DLY60D 002777778 90REFPOS 90REFNEG 98VAC___ REFPOS REFNEG 98RAMP1_58 UNITY 98COMP1 RAMP1 ANGLE_ 180 AND UNITY 98DCMP1_54 COMP1_ 98PULS1 _ NOT DCMP1 AND COMP1_ 98PULS2_54
105. Nodes and Data pages the control parameters for each object data can be specified The names of the data and the nodes do not have to be equal to the ones used in the DBM punch file If the number of phases is specified to 3 the user has two choices e to let ATPDraw write one five character node name in the Include statement and let the extensions A B and C be added inside the DBM punch file or e to let ATPDraw write three six character node names in the Include statement Checking the Old 3 phase button in the Component dialog box enables the first choice not recommended Each user specified components can also have an icon which represents the object on the screen and an optional on line help which describes the meaning of parameters These properties can be edited using the built in Help and Icon Editor exactly the same way as it was described in the previous session Finally after clicking the Save or Save As buttons the new support file will be saved to disk Support files for user specified components are normally located in the USP folder The file name can be specified in a standard file save dialog box The object must have the extension oOUE 4 2 5 4 Edit User Specified The user specified objects can be edited in the same way as the standard components The menus are identical as shown in Fig 4 20 Fig 4 24 The Digits field in the data control page Fig 4 21 specifies the number of characters used for the data paramete
106. O X0010C L 0 x0001A 1 00E7 O X0001B 1 00E7 O XO001C 1 00E7 O SWITCH C lt n 1 gt lt n 2 gt lt Tclose gt lt Top Tde gt lt Ie gt lt V CLOP gt lt type gt XOOO5AX0001A 03333 10 0 XO0005BX0001B 0361 10 0 XOO0O05CX0001C 0388 10 0 XOO1LOAXOO05A sl 3333 10 0 X0010BX0005B sE el 10 0 XO0O010CX0005C 1388 104 0 SOURCE C lt n 1 gt lt gt lt Ampl gt lt Freq gt lt Phase T0 gt lt Al gt lt TI gt lt TSTART gt lt TSTOP gt 14X0003A 0 408248 60 Alls il 14X0003B 0 408248 60 sTo f ile 14X0003C 0 408248 60 Lai aly Ta BLANK BRANCH BLANK SWITCH BLANK SOURCE X0001AX0001BX0001CX0002AX0002BX0002CX0005AX0005BX0005C BLANK OUTPUT BLANK PLOT BEGIN NEW DATA case BLANK 5 2 TACS controlled induction machine Exa_4 cir This example shows the usage of a universal machine type 3 manual initialization along with usage of TACS Also the info arrows whose purpose is to visualize TACS variables into FORTRAN statements are shown The info arrows are selected under TACS Draw relation in the component selection menu and they are handled graphically as normal connections They do not affect the ATP file however The example is taken from exercise 46 in 2 The ATPDraw constructed circuit is shown in Fig 5 4 b TACS TACS controlled pulse width modulated sources Type 60 791 2 V peak to peak Moment of inertia J 5kg nf Viscous damping D 0 075 Nnmyrad s Moment T 374 03889 Nm Fig 5 4 a
107. P file starting in column 12 in the TACS card The user can also define the Type of the object 88 98 or 99 in the DATA field Draw relation Relations are used to visualize information flow into Fortran statements These objects are drawn as blue connections but do not influence the connectivity of components They are used exactly the same way as connections When you select Draw relation the mouse cursor will change to a pointing hand and the program is waiting for a left mouse click on a circuit node to set the starting point of the new relation To cancel drawing a relation click the right mouse button or press the Esc key Devices The Devices menu consists of the following items freq_sensor 50 DEVICE SO TACS type Frequency sensor 88 98 or 99 relay switch 51 DEVICES1 zE TACS type Relay switch 88 98 or 99 ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 101 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Reference Manual level switch 52 DEVICE52 el TACS type Level switch 88 98 or 99 trans_delay 53 DEVICES TACS type Transport delay 88 98 or 99 pulse_delay 54 DEVICE54 TACS type Pulse delay 88 98 or 99 cont_integ 58 DEVICE58 TACS type Controlled integrator 88 98 or 99 simple_deriv 59 DEVICE59 TACS type Simple derivative 88 98 or 99 input_IF 60 DEVICE60 TACS type Input IF component 88 98 or 99 signal_select 61 DEVICE61 TACS type Signal selector 88 98 or 99 sample_track 62 DEVICE
108. PCH so it is not repeated here 2IN__ BOUT _B 2 000 2 3 DEEE Same as in the file JMARTI_1 PCH so it is not repeated here L3IN_ COUT_C 2 000 2 3 DERE Same as in the file JMARTI_1 PCH so it is not repeated here SEOF ARG IN A IN B IN C GUT A OUT B OUT_ C The new line object s data input window is shown in Fig 5 19 In the Include field the name of the library must be specified which is JMARTI_1 LIB in this example When Auto path option is selected in the ATP Settings File format page ATPDraw inserts the prefix C ATPDraw USP and the extension LIB automatically in the ATP file If the Auto path option is disabled the full path of the library file must be used as the first parameter of the Include field Send parameters attribute must be selected here Deselect the Old 3 phase if the library file has been created via the Overhead Line PCH menu When the library file has been created by the user outside ATPDraw the Old 3 phase option must be used in accordance with the number of arguments in the ARG card of the DBM file If this option is selected ATPDraw sends only the first 5 characters of the 3 phase nodes to the Include argument list When this option is unchecked 3x6 character node names will be sent User specified LCC N3 Attributes MODE PHASE NAME IN 3 GIIT 3 Group Mo fo Label Comment JMart User specified MW Send parameters lnclude JAW
109. RANSFORMER Sat Y A 3 ph TRAYD_ 3 Ya BRANCH TRANSFORMER ATPDraw version 1 for Windows Single phase saturable transformer Single phase ideal transformer 3x1 phase saturable transformer D Y coupled windings 3 phase node 3x1 phase saturable transformer Y D coupled windings 3 phase node 97 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Reference Manual ts BRANCH 3x1 phase saturable transformer Sat Y Y3ph TRAYY_3 4CQ P marra i BRANCH Y Y coupled windings 3 phase node Sat WA 3 ph TRADD_3 ae BRANCH 3x1 phase saturable transformer TRANSFORMER D D coupled windings 3 phase node Sat Y Y A3 ph TRAYYD_3 BRANCH 3x 1 phase saturable transformer 3 TRANSFORMER wip Y Y D coupled windings 3 phase node Sat Y Y 3 leg TRAYYH gt BRANCH 3 phase saturable transformer High TRANSFORMER homopolar reluct 3 leg 3 ph node THREE PHASE Preprocessing of manufact data The nonlinear magnetizing characteristic of the saturable transformers can be given in the Characteristic page of the component dialog box The saturable transformers have an input window like the one shown in Fig 4 43 In this window data for the saturating magnetizing branch can be specified The RMS flag indicates the form of the non linear characteristic If the check box Include characteristic is selected on the Attributes page of the component dialog box the disk file referenced in the Include field will be used Thus
110. RING SENDB LNIB MEASURING SENDC LNIC MEASURING RECVA X0032A L 2075 RECVB X0032B eet ee Us RECVC X0032C Sata 1 SOURCE C lt n 1 gt lt gt lt Ampl gt lt Freq gt lt Phase T0 gt lt Al gt lt T1 gt lt TSTART gt lt TSTOP 14X0022A 0 612300 SU la 14X0022B 612300 o 1 20 l 14X0022C 612300 SUs TU I 14X0031A 612300 Os 10 14X0031B 612300 5U O La 14X0031C 0 612300 5U LaO la BLANK BRANCH BLANK SWITCH BLANK SOURCE SENDA SENDB SENDC RECVA RECVB RECVC BLANK OUTPUT BLANK PLOT BEGIN NEW DATA CASE BLANK OoorRrFrFOOCO OO V oo oo PRP eR Fig 5 24 shows the results of the simulation The first three curves are the phase to ground voltages at the receiving end of the line When the secondary arc current extinguishes an oscillating trapped charge appears on the faulty phase which is the characteristics of the shunt compensated lines The next figure shows the phase currents during and after the fault Fig 5 25 shows the oscillograms of the phase voltages and currents recorded by high speed transient disturbance recorder at the staged fault test The field test records are shown here just for verification of the simulation ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 140 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Advanced Manual U kV 1 SENDA 2 SENDB 3 SENDC 2000 1500 1000 500 500 1000 1500 2000 0 100 200 300 400 T ms A 7 SENDA LN1A 8 SENDB LN1B 9 SENDC LNIC 6000 500
111. S AMAJOR m RSG IRSEP CNAME a ee e Te Fig 6 24 Output request settings for SC cable modeling Modal output KMODE Modal quantities will be calculated L if checked L matrix will be calculated w L if checked L matrix will be calculated Always output of R specifies IZFLAG C if selected C matrix will be calculated w C if selected O C matrix will be calculated Always output of R specifies IZFLAG SPUNCH checked enables PUNCH output If both PI and J Marti are unchecked a KCLee output is created PI when selected equivalent PI circuit will be calculated Homogeneous selected Cross bonding No Normal pi circuit Recommended NGRND 0 if NPAIS lt 3 Yes All sheaths and armors short circuited Sheath and armor grounded through RSG each major section NGRND must be O not tested Not valid for transient studies Recommended NPAIS gt gt 3 Discrete selected Cross bonding No Similar as homogeneous but potential of each conductor kept separate for each major section and the interconnection between each section is determined by IRSEP ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 185 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Line Cable Manual IRSEP 0 Sheaths and armors short circuited each major section IRSEP lt gt 0 Sheaths and armors are Kept separated Sheaths and armors are grounded through RSG each major section If IRSEP lt gt 0 and RGS is large this case degenerates to the homogeneous ca
112. SB lt 01 0 T BUSC 01 0 BRANCH 96T_BUSAT_BUSC 8888 1 SINCLUDE HYSTR400 BRANCH 96T BUSCT_BUSB 8888 1 SINCLUDE HYSTR400 C User specified object C ATPDRAW USP LINTR400 SUP C HV_BUS H_BUSA C LV_BUS lL BUSA C TV_BUS T_BUSA SINCLUDE LINTR400 H_ BUSA H_BUSB H_BUSC L_BUSA L_BUSB L_BUSC T_BUSA gt T BUSB T BUSC SWITCH C lt n 1 gt lt n 2 gt lt Tclose gt lt Top Tde gt lt Ie gt lt V CLOP gt lt type gt ATPDraw version 1 for Windows version 1 0 Advanced Manual 163 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Advanced Manual SUPLA H_BUSA 1 045 1 il SUPLB H_BUSB 1 045 1 1 SUPLC H_BUSC 1 045 ie il XX0028T_BUSA ils 0 SUPLA H_BUSA 0735 iz il SUPLB H_BUSB 20785 l 1 SUPLC H_BUSC 0795 E il XX0036T_BUSC 1 O XX0049T_BUSB 00666 1 O XX0051IT_BUSA 00666 1 O XX0064T_BUSC 00333 1 O XX0066T_BUSB 00333 1 O SOURCE C lt n 1 gt lt gt lt Ampl gt lt Freq gt lt Phase T0 gt lt A1 SK T1 gt lt TSTART gt lt TSTOP gt 14SOURCA 0 326600 50 1 1 14SOURCB 0 326600 50 120 1 1 14SOURCC 0 326600 50 120 1 1 BLANK TACS BLANK BRANCH BLANK SWITCH BLANK SOURCE L_BUSAL_BUSBL_BUSCH_BUSAH_BUSBH_BUSC BLANK OUTPUT BLANK PLOT BEGIN NEW DATA CASE BLANK The results of the simulation are shown in Fig 5 44 Initially the upper switch is assumed to be disconnected and the lower one connects the transformer to the source Thus only a small magnetizing
113. SRES Ae BRANCH TACS MODELS controlled type 91 resistor Component MOV x Attributes Characteristic Arrester Data L fiooono W 160000 170000 185000 217000 er 000 ear 00i 316000 File lnclude Browse Include characteristic OF Cancel Help Fig 4 43 Input window for nonlinear characteristic The Characteristic page of the component dialog box specifies the input characteristic for a non linear object New pairs of input values are set in the data field at the top of the page When you press the Enter key in the rightmost field or select the nsert button the current input values are transferred to the points table in the position above the currently marked line ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 90 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Reference Manual To delete a line from the table select one or more lines by pressing and holding down the left mouse button while dragging the mouse cursor up or down Release the mouse button and select the Remove button The and arrow buttons can be used to change the position of the currently selected line in the table step by step up or down If you specify a metal oxide arrester with MOV Type 92 component ATPDraw accepts the current voltage characteristic for the arrester and performs an exponential fitting in the logarithmic In In domain and produces the required ATP data format The File section at the bottom of the page contains an nclu
114. The cable is in the air or underground No of cables NPC Number of cables which make up the system Rho gt Ground resistivity ohm m Freq Frequency Hz If Log freq is selected DEC lt Number of frequency decades starting from Freq PNT Number of frequency points per decade Modal output request printed output of modal quantities for the core When Nakagawa is selected a three layer earth model will be used DEPI2Z2 Depth of first layer m DEP23 Depth of second layer m Rho2 Resistiviy of second layer ohmm Rho3 Resistiviy of third layer ohm m Resistiviy of the first layer is defined by Rho mul relative permeability of first layer mu2 relative permeability of second layer mu3 relative permeability of third layer epsl relative permittivity of first layer eps2 relative permittivity of second layer eps3 relative permittivity of third layer ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 184 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Line Cable Manual Output data tab General Modal output VIR iLL FIL Powe Cc lf SPUNCH J Marti Freqss bo Freqinit 0 Dist F Default fitting Misc Idebug Ipunch Koutpr Gmode fC NexMis Epstot P NorMax leCode F ifPlot F InElim Tlitwta T Dat Al NexMis az NorMax 0 M leCode FIfPlot F InElim Cifwta r IfDat EpsTol 0 Amnaie When PI is selected PI modelling Homogeneous Discrete Yes imitation NPAI
115. X F explains in detail how to create such a file Since only 3x3 node names will be sent to the module from the outside the header of the DBM file shows only ARG parameters following the DATA BASE MODULE request card These variables are used in the final ATP files as the parameters of the INCLUDE expression The arguments to this procedure are HVBUSA HVBUSB HVBUSC The 3 phase node of the high voltage terminal LVBUSA LVBUSB LVBUSC The 3 phase node of the low voltage terminal TVBUSA TVBUSB TVBUSC The 3 phase node of the tertiary terminal ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 157 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Advanced Manual The closing and header section are the same as in any other Data Base Module cases The rest of the file describes the transformer model as produced by the BCTRAN supporting routine of ATP The structure of the DBM input file is shown below BEGIN NEW DATA CASE NOSORT DATA BASE MODULE SERASE ARG HVBUSA HVBUSB HVBUSC LVBUSA LVBUSB LVBUSC TVBUSA TVBUSB TVBUSC lt lt lt lt the PCH file generated by the gt gt gt gt lt lt lt lt BCTRAN supporting routine must gt gt gt gt lt lt lt lt be inserted here gt gt gt gt BEGIN NEW DATA CASE C SPUNCH BEGIN NEW DATA CASE BLANK Running this DBM module file through ATP will produce a PCH punch file listed here KARD 3 3 4 4 6 61010 11 13 13 16 16 20 25 25 31 31 36 46 46 KARG 7 9 7 8 8 9 1 4 4 7 9 2 5 5 7 8
116. XA VSlxxc In Fig 5 17 four curves from the simulation are shown The results are the same as in 2 ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 130 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Advanced Manual U kV kA Ara a a a Ce memm mm em _mmmemeeme a L 1 a 4 a KSN F ff 1 I ac 100 Nou 30 T ms Fig 5 17 ATP simulation results 5 5 Using Overhead Line PCH objects This example demonstrates how to use the Overhead Line PCH objects the new program module at the bottom of the Component selection menu for modeling transmission lines and cables in ATPDraw PCH objects are also based on the Data Base Modularization option in ATP but users do not need to create supporting files because they are already pre defined for the most frequently used single and multi phase frequency dependent JMarti lines constant parameter distributed KCLee Clarke lines and Pl equivalent lines When the pre defined supporting files do not meet the user s requirements it is also possible to create own supporting files similarly to that in the previous example The Overhead Line PCH menu item enables loading of punch files created by the Line Cable constants supporting routines After selecting a punch file the format is checked and if recognized a LIB file with the same name as the PCH file will be created automatically ATPDraw converts the PCH files to be compatible with the Data Base Modularization format
117. XXI LINE CONSTANTS of the ATP Rule Book 3 The meaning and available settings of parameters are described here Ph no phase number O ground wire Skin 0 no skin effect RESIS AC resistance T D Skin effect RESIS DC resistance T D is the tubular thickness conductor diameter ratio SKIN 0 5 tor solid conductors Resis AC or DC resistance in ohm km or ohm mile See Skin IX O REACT reactance for one unit spacing m or foot at Freq 1 REACT reactance for one unit spacing m or foot at 60 Hz 2 REACT Geometric mean radius cm or inch 3 REACT GMR R Solid conductor 0 7788 4 REACT Blank Correction for skin effect React Self inductance parameter Diam outside diameter cm or inch of one conductor component Horiz Horizontal distance m or foot from the centre of bundle to a user selectable reference line VTower vertical bundle height at tower m or foot VMid vertical bundle height at mid span m or foot The height h 2 3 VMid 1 3 VTower is used in the calculations The next three columns are displayed only when the Auto bundling checkbox is selected Separ Distance between conductors in a bundle cm or inch Alpha Angular position of one of the conductors in a bundle measured counter clockwise from the horizontal line NB Number of conductors in a bundle You can Add row to the table or Delete last row of the table using the gray buttons under the table The Add row command extends the tab
118. a constant K gain factor Both can be specified with or without limits G s G S _NOL TACS Laplace transfer function Order 0 9 No limits No limits G s G S _NAL TACS Laplace transfer function Order 0 9 Named limits Named dynamic limits G s Gio ELL TACS Laplace transfer function Order 0 9 Fixed limits 7 Fixed dynamic limits K K_NOL TACS Transfer function Order 0 No limits No limits K K_NAL TACS Transfer function Order 0 Named limits Named static limits K aes oleate TACS Transfer function Order 0 Fixed limits F Fixed static limits Sources The Sources menu contains the following items DC 11 DC OL TACS TACS DC source a I type 11 ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 100 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Reference Manual AC 14 AC UZ TACS TACS AC source I type 14 Pulse 23 PULSE_03 TACS TACS Square pulse train type 23 Ramp 24 RAMP_04 TACS TACS Sawtooth train I type 24 EMTP out EMTP_OUT TACS Value from the electrical circuit into TACS y type 90 93 90 EMTP node voltage 91 EMTP switch current 92 internal variable special EMTP comp 93 EMTP switch status Fortran 1 Only single phase Fortran statements are supported in ATPDraw for Windows The object icon is shown below F The OUT input field in the FORTRAN section at the bottom of the component dialog z box can be used for specification of the Fortran expression This expression is written into the AT
119. aaciann T atossecusciesvascosaicoeacdasoaessantesatetoancten 54 EY Doe Nise CU ea seaateaaastdaeinasnonedasieaaatnsneesedesoanroe oesusgt aad nasandensaenonedsaesedasiceaasesnosnedes E 54 he Ds M hg VOU Vie ste nos sats EAA NEE EAE AE EEE AE es coer ea deca sete ee seein EEA AE ET 55 AA a ven ee ee ve ee eT 55 clas E T EEEE EEN EE EEA E E A E NE EE E A E 55 NE MO OS E E E E ios oe E das iss ses A AEA T E A E E 55 a AA A a EER E ousesceeenseasoeetenseueeess 56 OA EE OM EAT EE E S E EE E E E OE E E A E E 56 AAN E A E a a ET E OENE AAE OEE E EN AE EET NE AE ONE 56 4 2 1 10 Save Metafile Windows 95 NT ONLY cccccccccccccccsscsseseseeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaasaeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaagags 56 4 2 1 11 Save Bitmap WindowS 3 x ONLY cccccccccccccccccccccccnaeaneseeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaseesssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaaaaags 56 Phe Dd Med AV OS ES CUMIN teh roca EAE A EE N P AA saa ote hse sige Gate ots AE a 56 Ae Meg MO P sce ceseeess cers tuesn suse socceiaceneg E 57 E AER S L i ences ose E E A A E NA E AETA 57 a E A E E E E E E E E 57 DD AA eco E E es E AE EE EAE AEA A ENEE 57 Aae Um OE O A T E 58 u AREPA O EEEE ae EE EAE SEA N E E EE ETNAS EE A AE T 58 P LS OY E E A E E E E E 58 EPA E a TE i PEEN E E EEE A EAEE N AE E A 58 BD 2D ADU SC AUG seas uoeataconsocuninaascanmenceeteacons sibetiesvvedsueces tease nessun tae vuedsesecteituneehincecosiawe dosendeitunenteaceassansee 58 4 2 2 6 Copy as Metafile Windows 95 NT ONLY cccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccece
120. abel Comment Hide f Lock OF Cancel Help Fig 5 6 Induction machine input window The numerical values in Fig 5 6 must be specified by the user as in the case for all object input windows The identity text in front of each attribute strictly follows the input variable in the ATP Rule Book 3 The ATP file created by ATPDraw is shown below BEGIN NEW DATA case C Generated by ATPDRAW Thu 14 May 1998 C A Bonneville Power Administration program C Programmed by H K H idalen at EFI NORWAY 1994 1997 SBEGIN PL4 COMMENTS C Induction motor supplied by a C pulse width modulated source C Test example 1 SEND PL4 COMMENTS SPREFIX C ATPDRAW USP SSUPE IX LIB SDUMMY XYZ00O C Miscellaneous Data Card POWER FREQUENCY 60 00001 el 500 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 O TACS HYBRID I TACS gees 1000 23PULS 2s 001 0005 0002532 98AMPL 4 0 FS 98SQPUL AMPL UNITY PULS 98VDELTA SQPUL DELTAT ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 118 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Advanced Manual 98VTRI 65 VDELTA 1 4VCONTA 95 60 90 14VCONTB 95 60 210 14VCONTC 95 60 30 98VB 2 0 SIGB 1 0 VD 2 0 98VA 2 0 SIGA 1 0 VD 2 0 98SIGA VCONTA GT VTRI 98VC 2 0 9IGC 1 0 VD 2 0 98SIGB VCONTB GT VTRI 98SIGC VCONTC GT VTRI 98VD 791 2 C 1 2 3 4 5 6 f 8 C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890 BRANCH C lt n les n 2 gt lt reri srel gt lt R
121. acement string This option displays the Windows standard Replace dialog box Character options Word Wrap Toggles wrapping of text at the right margin so that it fits in the window Font From the Windows standard Font dialog box you can change the font and text attributes of the text buffer The status bar at the bottom of the window displays the current line and character position of the text buffer caret and the buffer modified status This status bar is not visible when viewing the component help The text buffer is limited to 32kB in size and will therefore not be suitable for editing large files If you want to use your favorite text editor program rather than the built in editor you can specify the path of your program wordpad exe write exe etc on the Preferences page of the Tools Options dialog box 4 2 6 4 Options In the Tools Options menu several user customizable program options for a particular ATPDraw session can be set and saved to the ATPDraw ini file read by all succeeding sessions During program startup each option is given a default value Then the program searches for an ATPDraw ini file in the current directory the directory of the ATPDraw exe program the Windows installation directory and each of the directories specified in the PATH environment variable When an initialization file is found the search process stops and the file is loaded Any option values in this file override the default settings The
122. age of the Overhead Line PCH objects in combination with transposition objects are demonstrated In the DOS version of the program users had to be careful with the usage of transposition objects with the JMarti objects together since the phase sequence different from ABC was not recognized inside the DBM library file This limitation does not exist any more in the present version of ATPDraw The one line diagram of the simulated network is shown in Fig 5 22 In this study transients caused by a single line to ground fault on a 750 kV interconnection are investigated The results of the simulation are validated by means of field test records obtained at a staged fault test on the line ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 137 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Advanced Manual To simplify the comparison it was assumed in the simulation that the fault appears at the peak of the phase voltage and the circuit breakers operate exactly at same time as observed during the field test 400 kV 750 kV 10000 MVA ONA Single phase TA to ground fault J U L 750 kV tr line 6000 MVA l SHG 478 km I aay i O IY J E 1100 MVA Fig 5 22 Line to ground fault example The surplus of capacitive power generation of the 478 km long line is compensated by shunt reactors At the sending end two sets of neutral reactors are applied to reduce the amplitude of the secondary arc current The staged fault has been initiated at the receiving end of th
123. al links and a relatively large index register support the users in searching Selecting Contents tab you get a lists of available help functions as shown on Fig 4 35 Help Topics ATPDraw Help 22x Contents index Find Click atopic and then click Display Or click another tab such as Index Getting Started 0 User Interface Objects Map Window a biain Winco Edit menu lew menu ATP menu Objects menu Tools menu Window menu Help menu Toolbar status bar File NotFound dialog save PostScript dialog Circuit Window gt Customizing Components db ATO Catinan Mialan Display Print Cancel Fig 4 35 ATPDraw s on line help ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 82 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Reference Manual This page allows you to move through the list and select an entry on which you need help To display an entry select one from the list by a simple mouse click and press Display or double click on the entry with the mouse Index and Find tabs are used to obtain help by naming the topics you are looking for E g if you ask for help on topics Circuit Window type these two words in the uppermost input field on the Index page and press the Display button Then description of the Circuit Window topics will be displayed as shown below including several links marked as green underlined text File Edt Bookmark Options Help Circuit Window The circuit window is the container of circuit obje
124. also update the circuit s Modified state in the status bar to indicate that the circuit has been modified During an undo operation the modified state is reset its previous value If you undo the very first edit operation the Modified text in the status bar will disappear Any operations undone can be redone Since only a limited number of buffers are allocated you are never guaranteed to undo all modifications 4 2 2 2 Cut Copies the selected objects to the Windows clipboard and deletes them from the circuit window The objects can later be pasted into the same or other circuit windows or even other instances of ATPDraw Short key Ctrl X or Shift Del 4 2 2 3 Copy Copies the selected objects to the clipboard Short key Ctrl C or Ctrl Ins A single marked object or a group of objects can be copied to the clipboard This command unselects the selected objects 4 2 2 4 Paste The contents of the clipboard are pasted into the current circuit when this menu item is selected Short key Ctrl V or Shift Ins The pasted objects appear in the current window in marked moveable mode 4 2 2 5 Duplicate Copies the selected object or a group of objects to the clipboard and then duplicates them in the current circuit window Duplicated objects appear in the current window in marked moveable mode Short key Ctrl D 4 2 2 6 Copy as Metafile Windows 95 NT only Copies the selected objects to the clipboard as a Windows Metafile object This way
125. ames are forced to be left adjusted and as a general rule in the ATP simulation capital letters should be used ATPDraw does accept lower case characters in the node data window however this feature should be avoided in particular if the node is connected with electric sources Node data x Frorm NEG l Ground POS M Display Fig 3 27 Click on a node with the right mouse button and specify a name in the node data window The name NEG will be assigned to all nodes visually connected CAT M Ground M Display Fig 3 28 Click on a node with the right mouse button and check the Ground box indicating that the node is connected with the ground reference plane of the circuit ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 44 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Introductory Manual The ground symbol is drawn at the selected node when you exit the window as Fig 3 29 shows The nodes not given a name by the user will automatically be given a name by ATPDraw starting with XX followed by a four digit number Nodes got the name this way i e from the program are distinguished by red color from the user specified node names as shown in Fig 3 29 ALS vs T Ground Display Fig 3 29 Click on the voltage source node with the right mouse button and specify the source node name 3 7 2 Storing the circuit file on disk You can store the circuit in a disk file whenever you like during the buil
126. an be used for a subsequent simulation as input to ATP The ATP files are located in the ATP sub directory and they can be edited with any text processors including ATPDraw s own Text Editor in the Tools menu It is advised however only for experts to manipulate this file manually This is the punch file produced by ATP after processing a Data Base Module file The file must be given a name with extension LIB and stored in the USP directory A DBM punch file can be included in the ATP file with Include and is used by all user specified objects in ATPDraw All types of ATPDraw objects have a support file This binary file specifies the data and nodes for an object with the icon and help information included The support file can be edited inside ATPDraw via Objects Edit menu The graphical representation of objects on the screen is editable via ATPDraw s built in icon editor New objects can be created by specifying new support files The support files should have a name with extension SUP The full path 1s included in the data structure so a user can store the files anywhere he likes After installation the support files of standard components are stored in the SUP directory the user specified objects in the USP directory the TACS objects in the TAC directory and the MODELS objects in the MOD directory All MODELS objects have a model file which is a text file containing the actual Model description This file is included i
127. and English unit High accuracy FCAR If button is checked highest accuracy is used in Carson s tormilas ATP Draw version 1 for Windows 176 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Line Cable Manual Seg ground Segmented ground wires If button is unchecked then the ground wires are assumed to be continuously grounded leap Specifies selection between the capacitance matrix and the susceptance matrix MC Y Z Sym If selected shunt admittance impedance and transfer admittance impedance of the symmetrical components of the system of equivalent phase conductors will be calculated perfect transposition assumed ee Full If selected shunt admittance impedance and transfer admittance impedance of the unreduced system will be calculated Punch 44 Request for punching of nominal PI circuit 6 9 3 JMarti line model The parameter names used in Fig 6 14 are identical with those ones of used in Chapter XVII JMARTI setup of the ATP Rule Book 3 Line Model J Marti V Metric unit M High accuracy FCAR Rho ohmm Freq Hz M Seg ground DEG Dist km az Freq SS Hz PNT Freqinit Hz P M Real matrix TR F Default Fitting fC NexMis l leCode T tat p r ifWta T InElim NorMax gt p EpsTol r IfPlot Al e NexMis EpsTo 0 M leCode r IfDat e r itwta M inelim NorMax gt AminAl M IfPlot Fig 6 14 Settings for JMarti lines Rhos The ground resistivity in ohm of the homogenous earth Dies
128. arning Enables disables the visible warning red color of components and nodes not opened and given meaningful data The parameters accept boolean values only On Off True False 1 or 0 Default settings NodeNames Off Labels On Component s On Models On Tacs On Connect ions On Relations On NodeDots On Dragicon On NoDataWarning On ATP Settings Parameter Type Description DeltaT Real Time step of simulation in seconds Tmax Real End time of simulation in seconds Xopt Real Inductances in mH if zero otherwise inductances in Ohm with Xopt as frequency Copt Real Capacitances in mF if zero otherwise capacitances in Ohm with Copt as frequency SysFreq Real System frequency in Hz Out Integer Frequency of LUNIT6 output within the time step loop For example a value of 3 means that every third time step will be printed Plot Integer Frequency of saving solution points to the PL4 output file For example a value of 2 means that every second time step will be written to the PL4 file Double Integer If 1 table of connectivity written in the LUNIT6 output file If O zero no such table written KssOut Integer Controls steady state printout to the LUNIT 6 output file Possible values are 0 No printout 1 Print complete steady state solution Branch flows switch flows and source injection 2 Print switch flows and source injection 3 Print switch flows source injection and branch flows requested in
129. as the copy of the bitmap of the conductor arrangement to the Windows clipboard Considering the user specified data the corresponding ATP file is generated in the ATP Create data case menu of the program This file 1s ready to be processed by ATP to create punched output PCH file or matrix output LIS file The punch files created by ATP is in most cases readable directly by the ATPDraw for Windows via the last menu item on the component selection menu Overhead lines PCH The ATP_LCC program now supports the following cases for LINE CONSTANTS Constant parameter KCLee and Clack lines JMarti lines PI equivalents Single frequency output Logarithmic frequency output Mutual coupling output and for the CABLE CONSTANTS e Overhead lines e Single core cables e Enclosing pipes ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 167 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Line Cable Manual 6 2 How to get the program ATP_LCC is available via FIP from an anonymous sever at ftp ce mtu edu IP 141 219 23 120 in the directory pub atp gui atp_lcc or on the mirror servers operated in Europe and in Japan The Username is anonymous the password is your full E mail address Download all files found in the atp_icc directory on the FTP sites At present you will find there a self extracting archive LCC EXE and a readme file Later there might be some patch files too Inexperienced Internet users can find a short guide to the ATP related Int
130. asic characters of the 3 phase nodes can be specified This option requires the Old 3 phase option be checked in the User specified field of the component window If this option is selected ATPDraw writes only five character long node names in the Include statement and let the extensions A B and C be added inside the DBM library file At the end of section 5 4 3 more explanation about the usage of this ATPDraw feature is given It must be noted however that the Old 3 phase option may result in conflicts with transposition objects and always requires full five character long node names To avoid conflicts it is suggested to use all three names of 3 phase nodes as input when you create new Data Base Module files 5 4 2 2 Creating icon and help file for the object Each user specified component must have an icon which represents the object on the screen and an optional on line help which describes the meaning of the parameters These properties can be edited using the built in Help and Icon Editors The button at the right hand side of the New User Specified dialog box is used to call the help editor All the functions and help editor menus are described in the Reference part of this manual and are not repeated here Fig 5 13 shows the help file associated with the user specified 6 phase rectifier bridge The Done button is used to return when you have finished editing the help Help Editor Ioj x File Edit Character Done User Specified Obj
131. ata of conductors as well as the geometrical arrangement of the cable system can be specified The structure of the cable data windows and the meaning of input field parameters are shown in section 6 10 of this manual 6 5 3 Open To open an existing line or cable data file select the Open command This will produce a standard Windows 3 1 style Open dialog box shown in Fig 6 3 where you select a file to load This command 1s also available via the toolbar icon The existing line and cable constant files in the ATP_LCC folder are shown below the File name field Selection can be made either by typing the file name directly or by a left mouse click in the file list Clicking OK will perform the selection made and the file is loaded Clicking on Cancel will simply close the window Open i Ea File name Folders c atp_Icc Cancel Network l Read only jmarti_1_lin List files of type Drives Line Cable Files 5 c w95_sy5S Fig 6 3 Opening an existing line or cable data file 6 5 4 Save This command allows you to save the current line or cable constant data file to a disk file This command is also available via the toolbar icon The suggested extension for a line constant case is LIN and for a cable constant case is CBL If the name noname 1linornoname cbl is shown in the Main window s header field a Save As dialog box will be performed where the user must specify the name of the disk file
132. ate a program group in Windows as follows 1 Select File New Program group 2 Specify ATPDraw for Windows as title and atpdraw grp as group file 3 Select Ok 4 Select File New Program item 5 Specify ATPDraw as Program title the name and path to atpdraw exe as Command parameter e g C atpdraw atpdraw exe and the ATPDraw directory as Working directory e g C atpdraw 6 Select Ok 7 To add an icon to the ATPDraw help file repeat steps 4 to 6 and specify ATPDraw Help as Program title and the path of the help file as Command e g C atpdraw atpdraw hlp Completing the previous installation steps and updating the atpdraw exe with the latest patch file the ATPDraw directory structure will be as follows when typing dir ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 16 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Installation Manual Volume in drive C is ATP_WORK Volume Serial Number is 1509 18CF Directory of C atpdraw lt DIR gt 96202 1 0 8 41 i lt DIR gt 96 307216 Odl ws SUP lt DIR gt 26 202 10 8 41 SUP CIR lt DIR gt 26202 4 ko GAl CIR MOD lt DIR gt 96202210 8 41 MOD ATP lt DIR gt 98 02 18 8 41 ATP TAC lt DIR gt Toal 1S 8 41 TAC USP lt DIR gt 96 07 16 8 41 USP ATPDRAW HLP 79 519 97 06 10 17 09 ATPDRAW HLP ATPDRAW EXE 9335 632 97 10 19 22 28 ATPDRAW EXE 2 file s 1 013 151 bytes So dir s 713 981 952 bytes free 2 4 Hardware requirements under Windows 95 NT IBM compatible PC 486 DX4 100 or fas
133. atrix TR Fig 6 12 Settings for a constant parameter line model Rho The ground resistivity in ohm of the homogenous earth Disk Length of overhead line Freq Frequency at which the parameters will be calculated Metric English Switching between the Metric and English unit High accuracy FCAR If button is checked highest accuracy is used in Carson s Tormulas Seg ground Segmented ground wires If button is unchecked then the ground wires are assumed to be continuously grounded Transposed The overhead line is transposed if button is checked Real Complex matrix TR Real matrix The eigenvectors of the transformation matrix are rotated closer to the real axis so that their imaginary part is assumed to become negligible Recommended for transient simulations Complex matrix Full complex transformation matrix will be used Recommended for steady state calculations 6 9 2 Pi equivalent line model Equivalent or nominal PI circuits will be calculated Fig 6 13 shows the setting options Line Model PL Circuits F Metric unit V High accuracy FCAR Rho ohmm Freq Hz 100090 M Seg ground pistikm Po Output Y F Icap w C Sym Full Symi F Full i Nominal Pl Fig 6 13 Settings for PI circuits output Rhos The ground resistivity in ohm of the homogenous earth Dike es Length of overhead line Freq Frequency at which the parameters will be calculated Metric English Switching between the Metric
134. aussaaesssseeeeeeeeeeeeess 156 5 8 1 Creating a new user specified BCTRAN Ob e Ct cccssssssssssseeeceeeeeeeeseeeeaaaaasseeeeeeeeeeeess 156 5 8 2 Creating a Data Base Module file for BCTRAN W i ccccsssesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeees 157 S EL T CU OIA TAG e O EET EE E E E A E EE E O ERE 159 UN O E E E T E A 160 5 8 5 Example circuit Transformer energization EXG_10O CIr ccccccccsssecessceeccceeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaesesssseeeeeeeees 161 eC Fe INIA oa E E laa T E T sends 165 1 NT OCC HOM oc sescaetessacnacceseen E eeasaea tiaosacaneasoen oat anocaaeticesasataceaceess 167 GZ HOw tO SEU NC pro riM eea unde e R 168 Oy How toinstall the progra Leerssen ieron nn ann o EE TAE OnE ER OEE EEEE 168 6 4 The Main window and the Main Mmenu ccccccsssseeeecceeeceeeeeeeaaseeesssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaesesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 169 Ca TEE TAC e a E E E E E E E sxe yestusectees 169 IN E E E E E E E E E S 169 PaL NON C I a E E E E E E A E er 170 ower EAA AE EAA EE go AE AEE TEA AEE ET 170 E S E asegosseoseceee 170 VN T E E E A E A T AE T E A EN A E 171 oa O E E E E cae so E A E A E E A T E A A 171 EPT E EE A PEIE O EE E E AET EAT E E E EET EE 171 Co Tera e E usdsawoastieavacatete poesdeasnoesteenbesoueetetses 171 RENEA E L EEE E A AAT T E AE AAN EE E EEE 171 O T E E E E E E E E isan sniatee ee gee 2 E E a E E E 172 Cr CATE WAC earo E rarr rO 172 OTEC ES GS aa ar A A A E a EE 172 OT EEA a a E EE sess vandaasaricessoeassonieeanceine 172
135. cccececeeeeeeeesecseseeeececeeeeeeeeeeeees 58 4 2 2 7 Copy as Bitmap Windows 3 x ONLY ccccccccccccccccccccnsseneeeeeesssseeeeeceeeeeeeeeaaaaaesssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaaaaags 59 IPOs NN a sosks sees ce secs ers ts seed session sain E sence ee E E E 59 RS OL CR tesa acre ease psec es cee oa mses se ca epee ce Gein tse E E enteapoe ea ataneeweenel 59 Oe Pa 1 EEEE E EAA A E EET 59 OANE E E E E o EIEEE IEEE cect as ss etic dase sc nine Sessa ote AA E AAEE A AAN EENE I A 59 LN e NOVO EI Kea E E LE E EE EE TS 59 A SRO O e O O 60 PAP A EIO A ee E E O I E E EAT 60 daa Ge R Oa a eg E E E 60 7a PNE E 0 EAA EAA TEE AA A E 60 ARS VY NE PEENE AAA A EE EA E AN E AE AN A EEEE E AAE A ESE E 6l Aa SATO NOAM a ceca oa aies ac sca cece aie cist astanctns ase eede asters eeoeeeasacuceoss 61 7A fess TED ene ene ee ae NE A A ee A en EPR nn ne ea eee meer 62 A Ws G6 814 01 01 E a mw EEE ee 62 Che OOM WN area besre vdeo ua Cocca i ascee asececen tae steeu do odmetbe as cendeateeseeau eeamaentenpehodaccstanpidvaseius tons udancedsaus 63 DM a OTA COU ae ca EE E T E aon sessed acu panacea E T E E E 63 A OOM e E R sueeeneeacaesceneueest onsnsesenssae senceeenstansoeeccaceieusss 63 JS NR E a E E A R E E E A 63 Wa S OO a E A secs aisha ase oedsveua tinea eese soesnasuendsventtmeeaeeeosteee 63 PPC ag sesnaeessecees E sasntae cease vane nonsaaseeenapanesoseeuseseeaboaesae aust soseeaeesasesedat soos aust esuseneyesaseeseses 64 A A AY 01 T O PP E ve Pe eee eee 65 A ie LUE Fe Be
136. cifies the directory in which ATP files are created atp SupportFiles The container of standard component support files sup UserSpecified Directory containing support sup library lib and punch pch files for user specified components Tacs The container of standard TACS component support files sup Models Directory containing support sup and model mod files for MODELS components By default the different directories or folders are expected to be located in the ATPDraw installation directory Default settings Circuits C ATPDRAW CIR ATP C ATPDRAW ATP SupportFiles C ATPDRAW SUP UserSpecified C ATPDRAW USP Tacs C ATPDRAW TAC Models C ATPDRAW MOD View Options Parameter Range Description NodeNames Enables disables the visibility of node names Labels Enables disables the visibility of component labels Components Enables disables the visibility of standard and user specified components Models Enables disables the visibility of MODELS components Tacs Enables disables the visibility of standard TACS components Connections Enables disables the visibility of connection lines Relations Enables disables the visibility of relation lines ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 106 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Reference Manual NodeDots Enables disables the visibility of node dots DragIcon Enables disables complete icon drawing during single component move operations NoDataW
137. ck or double click an unselected component or node either the Node data Component or Open Probe dialog box will appear allowing you to change component or node attributes and characteristics If you select a single component and press the Crtl F key combination the component specific help is displayed If you double click on a selected group of objects the Open Group dialog box will appear allowing you to change attributes common to all components in that group such as group number and hide and lock state Default component attributes are stored in support files Access to create and customize support files is provided by the Objects menu Components are connected if their nodes overlap or if a connection is drawn between the nodes To draw a connection between nodes click on a node with the left mouse button A line is drawn between that node and the mouse cursor Click the left mouse button again to place the connection clicking the right button cancels the operation The gridsnap facility helps overlapping the nodes Connected nodes are given the same name by the Make Names and Make File options in the ATP ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 33 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Introductory Manual menu Nodes can be attached along a connection as well as at connection end points A connection should not unintentionally cross other nodes what you see is what you get A warning for node naming appears during the ATP file creation if a
138. command Copies the selected objects to the Clipboard and deletes them from the circuit window The objects can later be pasted into the same or other circuit windows Copies the selected objects to the Clipboard Inserts the objects in the Clipboard into the circuit window Copies the selected objects to the Clipboard and then inserts them into the circuit Enables you to select and move a component or node text label The mouse cursor turns to a pointing hand Redraws all objects in the active circuit window Selects all objects in the active circuit window Enables you to select a group of objects by specifying a polygon shaped region in the active circuit window The mouse cursor style will turn to a pointing hand to indicate this mode of operation To close the region and unlock the mouse press the right mouse button Enlarges the objects by increasing the current zoom factor by 20 percent IF mA HOR A5 mE Diminishes the objects by reducing the current zoom factor by 20 percent Rotates the selected objects 90 degrees counter clockwise This operation can also be performed by clicking the right mouse button inside the selected region 6 ARP Flips the selected objects by rotating 180 degrees To the right of the speed buttons the nine most recently used component icons are displayed Selecting one of these shortcut icons inserts a new component into the active circuit window The leftmost icon represents always the last ins
139. cts From the file menu you can load circuit objects from disk or simply create an empty window to start building a new circuit Circuit objects include components standard user specified MODELS and TACS connections and relations The resolution of a circuit is 5000x5000 pixels screen points much higher than your screen normally would support Consequently the circuit window displays only a small portion of the circuit To move around in the circuit you use the window scrollbars or you drag the view rectangle of the map window to another position You may also want to use the zoom options in the view menu in order to zoom in or out on objects From the components menu you select components to insert into the circuit This menu pops up when you click the right mouse button in an empty space of the circuit window To start drawing a new connection click the left mouse button on a component node or the end point of an existing connection An inverted connection line will then follow the mouse cursor until you finish the drawing operation by clicking the left mouse button again or cancelling it by clicking the right mouse button Relations are drawn in much the same way except that you have to select the TACS Draw relation option in the components menu to start the relation drawing operation You can then draw multiple relations until you click the right mouse button Relations are used to visualize information flow into Fortran statements and ar
140. cts include standard ATP components user specified elements MODELS and TACS components connections and relations To move around in the circuit you can use the window scrollbars or drag the view rectangle of the Map window to another position Component selection menu This menu is hidden initially and pops up only after a right mouse button click in an empty space of the Circuit window In this menu all circuit objects can be selected After selecting an object in one of the fields or pop up menus the object is drawn in the circuit window in marked and moveable mode ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 28 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Introductory Manual Circuit comments A comment line below the circuit window shows a user defined circuit comment text MAP window This window gives a bird s eye view of the entire circuit The size of a circuit is 5000x5000 pixels screen points much larger than your screen would normally support Consequently the Circuit window displays only a small portion of the circuit The actual circuit window is represented by a rectangle in the Map window Press and hold down the left mouse button in the map rectangle to move around in the map When you release the mouse button the circuit window displays the part of the circuit defined by the new rectangle size and position The map window is a stay on top window meaning that it will always be displayed on the top of other windows You can show or hi
141. currents flow in the steady state Then the lower switch operates at 45 ms and high remanent flux remains in two of the phases The subsequent energization of the transformer could result in high inrush current as simulated in this case by closing the upper switches Steady state magnetizing current 0 8 0 4 0 0 0 4 0 8 1 2 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 c SUPLA H_BUSA c SUPLB H_BUSB c iSUPLC H_BUSC 500 A 3 3 3 3 3 Inrush current CUO ar re ceases eer mene ee eet ins ear ence eee S ees eG ees en see eae ee en TOO ee ee Seen eee Sanne LSA ee eee see ae ee ke een Sree on eee Sane 10 Le ee ne a ee ee aa ee Aes a ee en ere 200 hn ee Mee een ees reenter a eee Ree a A Se cnn a oes Sener 500 l l l 0 05 0 07 0 09 0 11 0 13 0 15 c SUPLA H_BUSA c SUPLB H_BUSB c SUPLC H_BUSC Fig 5 44 ATP simulation results ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 164 ATPDraw a for Windows version 1 0 6 Line Cable Manual ATPDraw FD for Windows ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 165 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Line Cable Manual This chapter is the manual for a new program called ATP_LCC a mouse controlled preprocessor for the LINE CONSTANTS CABLE CONSTANTS supporting routines of ATP It was first issued with the ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 and was not available in earlier versions The ATP_LCC manual is included here as the last chapter of the ATPDraw user s gu
142. d two connections to ensure this will be drawn later The resistor in Fig 3 8 would also be recognized as in parallel with the inductor if it had been placed in a position completely overlapping the inductor This tricky way is not recommended Fig 3 8 however since the readability of the drawing 1s strongly reduced We want to measure the source current flowing into the diode bridge To be able to do so you can add a measuring switch A special multi phase current probe is available for such measurements in ATPDraw When using this object you are requested to specify the number of phases and in which phases the current should be measured Select the probe as shown in Fig 3 9 ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 36 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Introductory Manual Probes amp S phase Probe olt Branch Linear Probe Curr Branch Nonlinear Probe Tacs Line Lumped Line Distributed Splitter Fig 3 9 Selecting current measuring probe AAA After you have clicked in the Probe Curr field the selected probe HE I appears in the circuit window enclosed by a rectangle Click on it with the left mouse button hold down and drag it to a position shown in the figure then place it At this stage of the building process it is time to draw some connections in the circuit diagram To draw a connection you just click the left mouse button on a node release the button and move the mouse The cursor style now changes to a pointi
143. de and two DC output nodes Also two external voltages whose difference is used as a zero crossing detector can be sent to the DBM file alternatively the DBM module file could have detected its own AC input The firing angle is required and the values of the snubber circuits are also passed to the DBM file The header of the DBM file shown above starts with the special request card DATA BASE MODULE followed by a variable list The first card is the ARG card giving all the input variables to the DBM file These variables are used in the final ATP files as the parameters of the INCLUDE expression The arguments to this procedure are U The AC 3 phase node POs The positive DC node NEG The negative DC node REF POS Positive reference node REF NEG Negative reference node REF POS REFNEG is used as a zero crossing detector ANGLE_ The firing angle of the thyristors Rsnub_ The resistance in the snubber circuits Csnub_ The capacitance in the snubber circuits Note the importance of the number of characters used for each parameter The U parameter has only 5 characters because it is a 3 phase node and the extensions A B and C are added inside the DBM file Underscore _ lt has been used to force the variables to occupy all the corresponding positions in the data cards ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 123 ATPDraw version for Windows 1 0 Advanced Manual The NUM card tells what arguments are numerical DU
144. de field where you can specify the name of a standard text file containing input characteristic values and the final 9999 card If the Include characteristic button is checked this file will be referenced in an STINCLUDE statement in the ATP file rather than including each of the value pairs from the points table This file must have extension LIB and be stored in the USP directory if the Auto path check box is selected on the File format page of the ATP Settings dialog box because in that case ATPDraw writes SPREFIX and SSUFFIX to the ATP file If the file is located somewhere else i e not in the USP directory use the Browse button to specify its path and uncheck the Auto path option 4 2 9 4 Line Lumped Selecting Line Lumped will display a popup menu where three different types of line models can be chosen All the line models are lumped elements frequency independent lines BLO Prequiv 1 RLCoupled51 RL Sym 51 Fig 4 44 Frequency independent line models RLC Pi equiv 1 These line models are simple lumped non symmetric pi equivalents of ATP type 1 2 3 etc Three selections are available RLC Pi equiv 1 GINERL A BRANCH Single phase RLC pi equivalent 1 ph type 1 RLC Pi equiv 1 LINEPT_2 BRANCH Two phase RLC pi equivalent 2ph type 1 2 Non symmetric RLC Pi equiv 1 LINE 1 ne mp BRANCH Three phase RLC pi equivalent 3 ph type 1 3 Non symmetric 3 phase nodes RL Coupled 51 These line models ar
145. de the map selecting the Map Window option in the Window menu or pressing the M character Status bar Action mode field The current action mode of the active circuit window is displayed in the status bar at the bottom of the main window when the Status Bar option 1s activated in the View menu ATPDraw can be in various action modes The normal mode of operation is MODE EDIT in which new objects are selected and data are given to objects Drawing connections brings ATPDraw into CONN END mode and so on ATPDraw s possible action modes are EDIT The normal mode CONN END After a click on a node the action mode turns into CONN END indicating that the program is waiting for a left mouse click to set the end point of a new connection To cancel drawing a connection click the right mouse button or press the ESC key to return to MODE EDIT MOVE LABEL Indicates a text label move Clicking the left mouse button on a text label then holding it down and dragging it enables you to move the label to a new position If the text label 1s overlapped by a component icon the text label can be moved using Move Label in the Edit menu Then the action mode turns into MOVE LABEL Releasing the mouse at the new text label location the action mode returns to MODE EDIT GROUP Indicates region selection Double clicking the left mouse button in an empty space of the active circuit window enables you to draw a polygon shaped region To end the selection
146. ding process This is done in the main menu with File Save or Ctrl S If the current circuit is a new one which has not been previously saved a Save As dialog box appears where you can specify the circuit name Two different styles of the Save As dialog boxes are available depending on the Open Save dialog setting in the Tools Options General menu a Windows 95 standard dialog box and a Windows 3 1 style The default extension is CIR in both cases and it is automatically added to the file name you have specified When the circuit once was saved the name of the disk file appears in the header field of the circuit window Then if you hit Ctrl S or press the Save circuit icon in the Toolbar the circuit file is updated immediately on the disk The File Save As option or the Save As icon from the Toolbar allows the user to save the circuit currently in use under a name other than that already allocated to this circuit 3 7 3 Creating ATP file The ATP file is the file required by ATP to simulate a circuit The ATP file is created by selecting Make File command in the ATP main menu Before you create the ATP file you must specify some miscellaneous parameters i e parameters that are printed to Misc Data card s of the ATP input file The default values of these parameters are given in the ATPDraw ini file Changing these default values can either be done in the Settings Simulation sub menu under the ATP main menu for the current circ
147. e must be specified in a notebook style dialog box with two tabs Line Model and Conductor card On the Line Model card you can choose the line model from the list of the supported classes in a combo box shown in Fig 6 9 Line Model Constant parmeter Constant parmeter Constant parameter KCLee Clack transposed line model Pl Circuits PlI equivalents equivalent and nominal PI circuit J Marti JMarti lines frequency dependent line model Single freq output Transfer and or shunt impedance admittance at a given frequency Mutual coupl output Calculate the coupling between a line and a 4 conductor Pos and zero sequence line parameters for several frequencies Fig 6 9 Supported line models in ATP_LCC The Conductor card tab is common for all line models The structure of this tab is shown in Fig 6 10 Line Model Conductor card Ph no Skin Resis Ix_ React Diam _ Horiz Vtower_ Vmid Separ AlphalN l fohmikmy em Im im tm jem ldea 21 63 9 83 10 21 63 9 83 10 21 63 9 83 10 21 63 9 83 10 21 63 9 83 10 21 63 9 83 10 30 5 23 2 10 30 5 10 u f e E E i i ao O O O O O O O T co D O O O O O OH oO oo oo oo a d G Add row Delete last row x Fig 6 10 Conductor card data input window ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 174 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Line Cable Manual The parameter names at the top of each column are identical with the ones used in Chapter
148. e type 11 TACS switch type 13 Measuring Double TACS switch type 12 ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 9 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Introduction Statistic independent Systematic independent Sources DC type 11 Ramp type 12 Two slope ramp type 13 AC 1 and 3 phase type 14 Double exponential source type 15 Heidler source type 15 TACS source type 60 Ungrounded DC source type 11 18 Ungrounded AC source type 14 18 Machines Synchronous machine type 59 with maximum 8 TACS control variables Universal machine Manual and automatic initialization Induction machine Type 3 DC machine Type 8 Synchronous machine Type 1 Transformers Singe phase ideal Type 18 source Single phase with saturation Saturable transformers 3 phase Coupling D D Y Y D Y Y D Y Y D Saturation calculation from RMS values included Transformer three phase 3 leg type Coupling Y Y Preprocessing of standard measurement data TACS Transfer functions G s with or without limits Sources DC AC PULSE RAMP EMTP node voltage FORTRAN Statements 1 phase Single line statement Devices Type 50 54 and 58 66 Initial condition User specified objects Users can create new objects in ATPDraw These objects are written to the ATP file using Data Base Modularization Some example cases are included 6 phase thyrisor bridge with control 3 phase J Marti overhead line transformer modeling using BCTRAN hysteretic inductor
149. e 54 in 2 BEGIN NEW DATA CASE NOSORT DATA BASE MODULE SERASE ARG U y POS _ NEG REFPOS REFNEG ANGLE_ RSnub_ Csnub_ NUM ANGLE_ RSnub_ Csnub_ DUM PULS1_ PULS2_ PULS3_ PULS4_ PULS5_ PULS6_ MID1__ MID2__ MID3___ DUM GATE _ GATE2_ GATE3_ GATE4_ GATE5_ GATE6_ VAC___ RAMP1_ COMP1_ DUM DCMP1_ DLY60D TACS LLDOLGYGOOD OOe 7 7 Fis SOREFPOS JOREF NEG 98VAC__ REFPOS REFNEG 98RAMP1_58 UNITY 120 00 0 0 1 0VAC__ 98COMP1_ RAMP1_ ANGLE_ 180 AND UNITY 98DCMP1_54 COMP1_ re Oh ate 98PULS1_ NOT DCMP1_ AND COMP1_ ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 122 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Advanced Manual 98PULS2_ 54 PULS1_ DLY60D 98PULS3_54 PULS2__ DLY60D 98PULS4_54 PULS3__ DLY60D 98PULS5 54 PULS4 __ DLY60D 98PULS6_54 PULS5__ DLY60D O8GATE PULS1 OR PULS2_ O8GATE2 PULS2_ OR PULS3_ O8GATE3 PULS3_ OR PULS4_ O8GATE4 PULS4_ OR PULS5_ O8GATE5 PULS5_ OR PULS6_ O8GATE6 PULS6_ OR PULS1_ BRANCH SVINTAGE 0 POS_ U A Rsnub_ Csnub_ POS_ U BPOS_ U A POS_ U CPOS_ U A U ANEG_POS_ U A U BNEG POS _iU A U CNEG POS _iU A SWITCH 11U APOS_ GATE1_ 11U BPOS_ GATE3 _ 110 CPOS__ GATES _ 1I1NEG_ U A GATE4_ 1I1NEG_ U B GATE6_ IINEG U C GATE BEGIN NEW DATA CASE C SPUNCH BEGIN NEW DATA CASE BLANK The user must first decide which data and node names to send to the module from the outside and must set the local variables A thyristor bridge needs a 3 phase AC input no
150. e compatible with the DOS Protected Mode Interface and could run more reliably in Windows DOS box as well as on network connected PCs In addition the program speed was increased since no overlay and disk Swapping were required Thanks to the continuous support of BPA the program development was going on A completely new release written in Borland Delphi is now available for the most popular Windows operating systems a 32 bit version for Windows 95 NT and a 16 bit version for Windows 3 x This User s Manual has been prepared for users of that recently issued ATPDraw version for Windows 1 4 Available components in ATPDraw ATPDraw supports most of the frequently used components in ATP 3 The components listed below are single phase as long as nothing else is specified Standard components Linear branches Resistor Inductor Capacitor RLC RLC 3 phase symmetric and non symmetric Inductor and capacitor with initial condition Non linear branches Current dependent resistor type 99 Current dependent inductor type 98 and type 93 Time dependent resistor type 97 Current dependent exponential resistor type 92 1 and 3 phase ARRDAT fitting included TACS controlled resistor Line models RLC pi equivalent 1 2 and 3 phase RL coupled 2 3 and 6 phase RL symmetric sequence input 3 and 6 phase Clarke distributed parameter 1 2 3 6 and 9 phase Switches Time controlled 1 and 3 phase Voltage controlled Diode type 11 Valv
151. e drawn as blue connections but have no influence on component connectivity To select and move an object simply press and hold down the left mouse button on the object while you move the mouse Release the button and click in an empty space to unselect and confirm its new position The object is then moved to the nearest grid point known as gridsnapping If two or more components overlap as a consequence of a move operation you are given a warning and can choose to cancel the unselection If you select a single component and press the Crtl F1 key combination component specific help is displayed Selecting a group of objects for moving can be done in three ways If you hold down the Shift key while you left click an object you add it to the selected objects group Pressing and holding down the left mouse button in an empty space enables you to drag a rectangular outline around the objects you want selected And finally if you double click the left mouse button in an empty space you can define a polygon shaped region by repeatedly clicking the left mouse button in the circuit window To close the region click the right mouse button on the last polygon point you want to set Objects that are defined to fall within the indicated region or rectangle are added to the selected objects group For components this means that the center point of a component icon must lie within the defined region or rectangle For connections and relations the region or
152. e has 7 sub sections The following tables list and describe the name and legal value range of available parameters as well as the default settings One line is required for each parameter and at least one space is needed between the parameter and any in line comment string ATPDraw Parameter Range Description AutoSave OnlOff Enables disables circuit file auto saving AutoSavelnterval 1 60 Specifies the autosave interval in number of minutes CreateBackupFile OnlOff Enables disables the creation of circuit backup files SaveWindowSizePos OnlOff Enables disables the storing of window size and position SaveWindowState OnlOff Enables disables the recording of main window current state SaveToolbarState OnlOff Enables disables the recording of toolbar visibility state SaveStatusBarState OnlOff Enables disables the recording of status bar visibility state SaveCommentLineSt OnlOff Enables disables the recording of circuit window comment line visibility state Win31DialogStyle OnlOff Enables disables Windows 3 1 style open and save dialogs SaveOnExit OnlOff Enables disables the auto saving of program options on exit PolyDots OnlOft Enables disables the removal of extra points left on screen by the polygon drawing function used to select groups of objects in the circuit window Some display adapters seem to invert the connection point of lines incorrectly PolyBug OnlOff Enables disables the use of an internal PolyLine function This
153. e line ATP_LCC program has been used to calculate the electrical parameters of the line and to create the JMARTI SETUP input files Three transposition points exist along the route so each LINE CONSTANTS case represents a line section with the length equal to 84 6 km 162 7 km 155 9 km 75 7 km respectively You can find all LCC input files LIN750_1 LIN LIN750_4 LIN for this case in the ATP_LCC directory The JMARTI SETUP file created by LCC for the first line section is shown below as an example BEGIN NEW DATA CASE JMARTI SETUP SERASE LINE CONSTANTS METRIC L wow 0585 4 3109 Sk an Afad 13 60 45 4 A wou 0585 4 ov L0S O Ated 13 60 45 4 oS psd 0585 4 Se US Le a a ee 13 60 45 4 ORI N 304 4 1 6 pele ae 41 05 Oslo 0 O 0 OP ell 7 304 4 lG IRE a2 41 05 20215 0 O 0 BLANK CARD ENDING CONDUCTOR CARDS La 3000 1 84 6 0 1 VAP 30 1 84 6 0 1 205 e03 1 84 6 0 7 10 1 0 BLANK CARD ENDING FREQUENCY CARDS BLANK CARD ENDING LINE CONSTANT O 0 O 0 O L 30 1 0 La 30 1 0S SPUNCH BLANK JMARTI BEGIN NEW DATA CASE BLANK CARD Processing the LCC created files with ATP separately four punch files LIN750_1 PCH LIN750_4 PCH will be generated which can be used as input for the Overhead Line PCH objects of ATPDraw as it was discussed in the previous example ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 138 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Advanced Manual Arc RES Fig 5 23 Line to ground fault study EXA_7a CIR The supp
154. e simple lumped non symmetric mutually RL coupled components of type 51 52 53 etc The popup menu has three selections ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 91 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Reference Manual RL Coupled 51 LINERL_2 BRANCH Two phase RL coupled line model 2 ph type 51 52 Non symmetric RL Coupled 51 LINERL_3 BRANCH Three phase RL coupled line model 3 ph type 51 53 Non symmetric 3 phase nodes RL Coupled 51 LINERL_6 BRANCH 2x3 phase RL coupled line model 6 ph L type 51 56 Non symmetric 3 phase nodes Off diagonal R s set to zero RLC Sym 51 These line models are symmetric with sequence value input The line models are special applications of the RL coupled line models in ATP The popup menu has two selections available RL Sym 51 LINESY_3 BRANCH Three phase RL coupled line model 3 ph type 51 53 with sequence 0 input Symmetric 3 phase nodes RL Sym 51 LINESY_6 BRANCH 2x3 phase RL coupled line model 6 ph i type 51 56 with sequence 0 input Symmetric 3 phase nodes 4 2 9 5 Line Distributed Selecting Line Distributed opens a popup menu where two different types of line models can be selected All the line models are distributed parameters frequency independent lines Transp lines 1 Nonsym lines Fig 4 45 Distributed transmission line models Transp lines 1 These components can be characterized as symmetric distributed parameter and
155. e up the system Each circuit has a uniform conductor style Rho Ground resistivity ohm m Freq Frequency Hz If Log freq is selected DEC Number of frequency decades starting from Freg PNT Number of frequency points per decade Modal output request printed output of modal quantities for the core When Nakagawa is selected a three layer earth model will be used DEP12 Depth of first layer m DEP23 Depth of second layer m Rho2 Resistiviy of second layer ohmm Rho3 Resistiviy of third layer ohm m Resistiviy of first layer is defined by Rho mul relative permeability of first layer mu2 relative permeability of second layer mu3 relative permeability of third layer epsl relative permittivity of first layer eps2 relative permittivity of second layer eps3 relative permittivity of third layer ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 181 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Line Cable Manual Output data tab PY Output General M Modal output M SPUNCH MIR wi IL Powe Cc J Marti Freqss bo Freqinit 0 Dist F Default fitting Misc Idebug Ipunch Koutpr Gmode Z C NexMis Epstoi P NorMax leCode F ifPlot F InElim r ifWta T Dat Al NexMis gt NorMax 0 M leCode F IfPlot M InElim Cifwta T IfDat EpsTol 0 Amnaie When PI is selected NPAIS XxXMAJOR m e Fig 6 21 Output request settings for overhead line modeling Modal output
156. ect b pulse rectifier bridge Requires a Data Base Module file HVDC_6 LIB The firing angle af the thyristors The resistance in the snubber circuits The capacitance in the snubber circuits The AC S phase node The positive DC node The negative DC node Positive reference node Ua Uc is used as a zero crossing detector Negative reference node Fig 5 13 Help editor ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 126 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Advanced Manual The icon at the right hand side of the New User Specified dialog box is used to call the icon editor All the functions and menus of the editor are described in the Reference part so this information is not repeated here In the icon editor window you can use your own fantasy Select pen colors from the palette at the bottom Click in the grid field with the left mouse button to place the color and the right mouse button to erase The red lines in the grid indicate the possible node positions on the icon border Lines should be drawn from the symbol in the middle and out to the node positions you have chosen in the window in Fig 5 12 The completed icon of the 6 pulse rectifier bridge is shown in Fig 5 14 Click on the Done button when you have finished a Icon Editor File Edit Tools Done Bt Fig 5 14 The icon associated with the new object Finally after clicking the Save or Save As buttons the new support file will be saved to disk The file name can
157. ecting this field draws the current probe measuring switch used to specify current output request in column 80 in the ATP file The number of phases to connect to and the phases to be monitored are user selectable Probe Tacs Selecting this field draws the Tacs probe used to specify signal output from TACS type 33 in the ATP file Splitter a The splitter object can be used as a transformation between a 3 phase node and three 1 phase nodes The object has O data and 4 nodes The object can be moved rotated selected deleted copied and exported as any other standard components ABC ABC When a splitter is rotated the phase sequence of the single phase side A A lt g g changes as shown left NOCE NODEA If a name has been given to the splitter s three phase side the letters A B C erie are added automatically on the single phase side as demonstrated left The following restrictions apply to this object e do not connect splitters together directly on the 3 phase side use a connection e normally do not give node names to the single phase side of the splitters e do not connect splitters together on the single phase side e g all three examples shown below are illegal A NOT_A ABC ABIC ABC ABC a nodes are _not_ connected all phases are connected transposition is not supported this way ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 86 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Reference Manual Transpl ABC BCA Selectin
158. ects an already mentioned transposition object in this case from ABC to BCA and a splitter object which splits three phase nodes into three single phase nodes Names 8 have been given to nodes in the circuit By selecting Make Names under ATP in the main menu ATPDraw examines the circuit and creates unique node names If you click with the right mouse button on nodes after selecting ATP Make Names you are able to see the phase sequence in the bottom of the node input window as shown in Fig 3 33 a Fig 3 34 b As shown in Fig 3 35 single phase nodes do not have a phase sequence but the single phase side of a splitter object has one as shown in Fig 3 34 b ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 48 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Introductory Manual e Ke IT fa l Ground ALJ f l Ground M Display Fhase sequence ABC M Display Fhase sequence BCA Fig 3 33 a Click right button on node 1 Fig 3 33 b Click right button on node 3 The node names in Fig 3 33 a are JA IB and 1C all left adjusted The node names in Fig 3 33 b are 3B 3C and 3A all left adjusted ATPDraw gives the phase sequence ABC to the sub network left of the first transposition object From Jee l Ground IN2 2 2 T Ground Help M Display Phase sequence CAB Display Phase sequence B Fig 3 34 a Click right button on node 7 Fig 3 34 b Click right on single phase node
159. ed object Opens the component dialog box On unselected object when you hold down the Shift key Opens the circuit window shortcut menu On selected object s Rotates object s In the open area of the circuit window Cancels connection made Left click and hold On object Moves object s On node Resizes connection it is often necessary to select connection first In the open area of the circuit window Draws a rectangle for group selection Objects inside the rectangle become a group when the mouse button is released Left double click On object node Performs the Node dialog box On unselected object Performs the Component dialog box On selected object Performs a Group Number specification window In the open area of the circuit window Starts the group selection facility Click left to create corners in an enclosing polygon click right to close Objects inside the polygon become a group 3 5 Edit operations ATPDraw offers the most common edit operations like copy paste duplicate rotate and delete The edit options operate on a single object or on a group of objects Objects must be selected before any edit operations can be performed Selected objects can also be exported to a disk file and any circuit files can be imported into another circuit Tool Shortcut key Equivalent in menus Copy Ctrl C Edit Copy Paste Ctrl V Edit Paste Duplicate Ctrl D Edit Duplicate Rotate Ctrl R Edit Rotate or right click Fl
160. eng gt lt gt lt gt 0 SLG_A a 0 XXOOLISENDA IO 2000 O XXOOLISENDB LO GOGO O XXOOQLLSENDC LO 2000 O XX0011 Le SOO 0 x0022AX0024A Ta LouU 0 X0022BX0024B Oe LOO O X0022CX0024C Te Lou 0 x0022AX0024A LOU O X0022BX0024B 150 O X0022CX0024C loU 0 XOO3ZAX0031A De os O X0032BX0031B De SUU 0 X0032CX0031C De J00 0 XOO3ZAX0031A LSU O X0032BX0031B ToU 0 X0032CX0031C La 0 ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 139 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Advanced Manual RECVA 20 6000 0 RECVB 20 6000 0 RECVC 20 2 6000 O Xx0024AX0027A Ze 200 O X0024BX0027B 2 200 O X0024CX0027C Za 200 O C JMarti C User specified object C ATPDRAW USP LCC_N3 SUP C IN1 LNIA C OUT1 TRANIA SINCLUDE LIN750_1 LNIA LNIB LN1IC TRANI1A TRANI1B TRANIC C JMarti C User specified object C ATPDRAW USP LCC_N3 SUP C IN1 TRANIC C OUTI TRAN2C SINCLUDE LIN750_2 TRAN1C TRAN1A TRAN1B TRAN2C TRAN2A TRAN2B C JMarti C User specified object C ATPDRAW USP LCC_N3 SUP C IN1 TRAN2B C OUT1 TRAN3B SINCLUDE LIN750_3 TRAN2B TRAN2C TRAN2A TRAN3B TRAN3C TRAN3A C JMarti C User specified object C ATPDRAW USP LCC_N3 SUP C IN1 TRAN3A C OUTI RECVA SINCLUDE LIN750_4 TRAN3A TRAN3B TRAN3C RECVA RECVB RECVC SWITCH C xn 12 lt n 2 gt lt Tolose gt lt Top Tde gt x Ie gt lt V CLOP gt lt type gt RECVA SLG_A 0285 eas 10 X002 7ASENDA L lt OTS X002 7BSENDB La iis X0027CSENDC le u SENDA LN1A MEASU
161. equest for obtaining the code should be directed to BPA 1 2 Short description of ATP ATP Alternative Transients Program is considered to be one of the most widely used software for digital simulation of transient phenomena of electromagnetic as well as electromechanical nature in electric power systems It has been continuously developed through international contributions over the past 20 years coordinated by the Canadian American EMTP Users Group co chaired by Drs W Scott Meyer and Tsu huei Liu ATPDraw version 1 for Windows T ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Introduction The ATP program calculates variables of interest within electric power networks as functions of time typically initiated by some disturbances Basically the trapezoidal rule of integration is used to solve the differential equations of system components in the time domain Non zero initial conditions can be determined either automatically by a steady state phasor solution or they can be entered by the user for some components ATP has many models including rotating machines transformers surge arresters transmission lines and cables With this digital program complex networks of arbitrary structure can be simulated Analysis of control systems power electronics equipment and components with nonlinear characteristics such as arcs and corona are also possible Symmetric or unsymmetric disturbances are allowed such as faults lightning surges any kind of
162. ere for compatibility with future versions Locked components are meant to have fixed positions and not subject for customization of component data and node names Many standard components such as branches non linear switches and transformers contain an Output section for setting the branch output request Possible values are Current Voltage Current amp Voltage Power amp Energy or none no button selected To obtain component specific help about data parameters select the Help button 4 2 9 3 Branch Nonlinear This menu contains the available nonlinear components Afi Type 99 All the objects except the TACS controlled resistor can also have a nonlinear Lt Type 38 characteristic These attributes can be specified by selecting the mE Characteristic tab of the notebook style Component dialog boxes as shown in MOV Type 92 Fig 4 43 MOY Type 3 ph RITACS Type 91 Fig 4 42 Nonlinear branch elements ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 89 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Reference Manual R i Type 99 NLINRES a BRANCH Current dependent resistance type 99 L i Type 98 NLININD aa BRANCH Current dependent inductance type 98 L i Type 93 NLIND93 eb BRANCH Current dependent inductance type 93 R t Type 97 NLINR_T V BRANCH Time dependent resistance type 97 MOV Type 92 MOV BRANCH Current dependent resistance type 92 on exponential form MOV Type 3 ph MOV_3 BRANCH 3 phase current dependent type 92 resistance R TACS Type 91 TAC
163. ernet resources in section 2 10 of the Installation Manual 6 3 How to install the program ATP_LCC does not need any special installation You just simply need to copy the auto decompressing archive LCC EXE to the desired ATP_LCC directory Then change to this directory and run LCC EXE which will decompress the archive Delete the LCC EXE file to free up some hard disk space as the final step of the installation After running LCC EXE the following files should be there in your ATP_LCC directory lt DIR gt 6206 05 13 43 n lt DIR gt oUb Lo Iori pa LCC EXE 219 8306 Y70016 21 20 LCC EXE AIP LCC EXE 529 664 97 060 13 23 27 ATP_LCC EXE H CABLE LIAL 9 604 970607 16 15 H CABLE TXT H LINE TXT 5 204 97 05 19 18 585 H LINE TXT TESI CBL T 6Ol 97 06 12 13 31 TEST CBL Tho i LIN 791 97 05 19 13 22 TEST LIN 7 file s 772 960 bytes Creating a program icon for ATP_LCC slightly depends on the version of the operating system you are using as shown below You can create a separate program group for the ATP_LCC but it is also practical to put its icon into your existing ATP or ATPDraw for Windows folder Windows 3 1x NT3 5x Select the New item in the Program Manager s File menu Create a new group by selecting the Program Group radio button first then press OK The description field in the next window specifies the name of the program group you are creating The Group File field is optional so you can leave it empty After pressing OK
164. erted component ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 61 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Reference Manual 4 2 3 2 Status bar Shows or hides the status bar at the bottom of the main window The status bar at the bottom of the main window displays status information about the active circuit window The mode field on the left hand side shows which mode of operation is active at present Possible modes are EDIT Normal mode Indicates no special type of operation CONN END Indicates the end of a connection The program is waiting for a left mouse button click to set the end point of a new connection To cancel drawing a connection click the right mouse button or press the Esc key MOVE LABEL Indicates a text label move Clicking the left mouse button on a text label then holding down and dragging enables you to move the label to a position of your choice To cancel moving a label click the right mouse button or press the Esc key GROUP Indicates region selection Double clicking the left mouse button in an empty area of the active circuit window enables you to draw a polygon shaped region To end the selection click the right mouse button Any object within the region becomes a member of the selected group To cancel region selection press the Esc key INFO START Indicates the start of a relation when TACS Draw relation is activated in the component selection menu Clicking the left mouse button on a component node or on the end poi
165. ey must be taken into account precisely The three winding three phase low reluctance transformer investigated in this study has been simulated by a BCTRAN model completed with three hysteretic nonlinear inductances Since neither of these ATP components are supported as standard ATPDraw objects a new user specified component has been developed for the BCTRAN model and a special use of the standard Type 93 nonlinear inductance object has been applied to represent the hysteresis loop of the core material This chapter of the manual explains how to include the BCTRAN model into your ATPDraw circuit and finally gives a practical example Exa_10 cir of the usage of the new object 5 8 1 Creating a new user specified BCTRAN object Supporting routine BCTRAN can be used to derive a linear representation for a single or 3 phase two three or multiple winding transformers using test data of both the excitation test and the short circuit test The nonlinear behavior can not be included in the BCTRAN model however adding Type 93 or Type 96 saturation or hysteresis elements connected to windings closest to the core the nonlinearities can be taken into account ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 156 ATPDraw for Windows DRAW version 1 0 Advanced Manual The BCTRAN model is based on test data can be obtained from the transformer manufacturers Voltage rating Vhigh Viow V tertiary 400 132 18 kV Winding connection Yyn0d11 Power rating 25
166. f the polygon then click the right button to enclose the polygon You can follow the procedure shown in Fig 3 15 HAS The group created in Fig 3 15 can be copied rotated etc like a single object Now we want to duplicate this group So enter the main menu Edit field and choose Duplicate or press the Ctrl D shortcut key The selected group is copied to the clipboard and pasted in the same operation The old group is redrawn in normal mode and the copy is drawn in the top of the original The fencing polygon is now a rectangle The pasted group is moveable so you can click on it with the left mouse button hold down and drag to a desired position Click the left mouse button on open space to put the group in the position shown in Fig 3 16 Only the enclosing polygon is drawn during a move T Ane operation The objects are drawn when the mouse I T button is released If you misplaced the group you can mark it again with Edit Select group Undo and Redo Fig 3 16 Move a group facilities are also available vie the main menu Edit You can now paste an other copy of the diode RLC group into the circuit Since the duplicate facility has already copied the group to the clipboard you can just select the Paste option from the Edit menu by using the mouse or pressing Ctrl V or selecting the Paste icon from the Toolbar The pasted group is drawn on top of the original one enclosed by a rectangle Click on this group with the left mouse butt
167. fer to a specified disk file Built in text editor only Prine sends the contents of the text buffer to the default Print Setup printer Enables you to define default printer characteristics Exit Cancel Closes the editor or viewer window If the option displays Exit and the text buffer has been modified you are given a chance to save the text before closing If a Done option is available from the main menu this option displays Cancel and the window is closed without any warning with respect to loss of modified data Edit options Undo Cancels the last edit operation Cut Copies selected text to the Clipboard and deletes the text from the buffer Copy Puts a copy of the selected text in the Clipboard ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 76 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Reference Manual Paste Inserts the text in the Clipboard into the text buffer at the current caret position Delete Deletes any selected text from the text buffer select All Selects all the text in the buffer Find Searches the text buffer for the first occurrence of a specified text string and jumps to and selects any matching text found This option displays the Windows standard Find dialog box Find Next Searches for the next occurrence of the text string previously specified in the Find dialog Find amp Replace Searches the text buffer for one or all occurrences of a specified text string and replaces any instance found with a specified repl
168. ference line Vtow Vmid and Horiz must be specified for each bundle Bundles Number of ground bundles in current circuit Cond Rout Rin SEP Rho mu Vtow Vmid Horiz ATPDraw version The position grid at the bottom changes size pr Bdl Number of ground conductors per bundle 0 handled as 1 OuLer radius Of ground conductor inner radius of ground conductor Solid conductor Rin v distance between ground conductors in a bundle O handled as blank resistivity of ground conductors relative permeability of ground conductors height of ground bundle at tower height of ground bundle at mid span h 2 3 Vmid 1 3 Vtow used in calculations horizontal position to user selectable reference line Vtow Vmid and Horiz must be specified for each bundle 1 for Windows 183 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Line Cable Manual 6 10 2 Cable without enclosing pipe This selection specifies a Class A type cable system which consists of single core SC coaxial cables without enclosing conducting pipe The cable system might be located underground or in the air Cable type data tab Cable type Single core cables ji n d GAJ roun Air No of cables Single freq l Rhojohmm Freq Hz 100000 M Log freq Log freq DEC PNT F Modal output core MV Nakagawa Nakagawa slayer DEP12 m DEP23 m Rho2fohmm 1000 Rho3fohmm Fig 6 23 Cable type settings for single core cable modeling Cable in
169. g detection time ENDIF IF trip 0 15 NOE Signaling to fire AND tfire gt 0O firing condition has been detected AND t tfire gt fdel 1 e 3 firing delay exceeded THEN trip 1 set the firing signal ENDIF ENDEXEC ENDMODEL The model file must be given a name with extension MOD and it must be stored in the MOD folder In this example the name FLASH_1 MOD was chosen The name of the model file must be the same as that of the actual model 5 6 2 Creating new MODELS object in ATPDraw To be able to use the just created model definition inside ATPDraw a model object must be created This process is similar to that established in section 5 4 2 of this manual To create a new object start up ATPDraw enter the Objects menu and select the New Model field A window appears where the user must specify the size of the model The model shown above has 4 nodes Number of cet input output and 4 data All MODELS nodes must be Number of nodes 4 Help single phase Fig 5 26 Specifying size of model After you have specified the values shown in Fig 5 26 click the OK button and the window closes Then a tabbed notebook style dialog box appears with two attribute tabs Data and Nodes Select the Data page where you must specify the values shown in Fig 5 27 Data Nodes The name of the data must be the same as those used in the Model file MOD Pset b 0 0 Eset b 4 0 0 fdel E 4 0 0 fdlur E 20 0 0 Fig 5 27 S
170. g ground Segmented ground wires If button is unchecked then the ground wires are assumed to be continuously grounded Note Transposed is selected internally by the program because ATP always assumes that the line is transposed in his case ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 179 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Line Cable Manual 6 10 The Cable data window Starting from physical and geometrical data the CABLE CONSTANTS routine of ATP calculates electrical characteristics for cables and overhead lines The input data for such a calculation must be specified in a notebook style dialog box having 5 tabs Cable type Output Pipe data Cable data and Line data see Fig 6 19 The Cable type tab has a combo box in which you can select the configuration classes as shown in Fig 6 18 Cable type Overhead line Overhead line Overhead transmission line single core cables gt Single core SC coaxial cable without enclosing pipe System of SC coaxial cables enclosed by a conducting pipe Enclosing pipe Fig 6 18 Supported cable type models in ATP_LCC The tabs Cable type and Output are accessible for all cable types The following logic controls the accessibility of the other three tabs e Selecting Overhead line only the tab Line data will be accessible e Selecting Single core cables only the tab Cable data will be accessible e Selecting Enclosing pipe the tabs Cable data and Pipe data will be accessible Cable
171. g this field draws a transposition object used to change the phase sequence for 3 phase nodes from ABC to BCA Transp2 ABC CAB Selecting this field draws a transposition object used to change the phase sequence for 3 phase nodes from ABC to CAB Transp3 ABC CBA Selecting this field draws a transposition object used to change the phase sequence for 3 phase nodes from ABC to CBA Transp4 ABC ACB Selecting this field draws a transposition object used to change the phase sequence for 3 phase nodes from ABC to ACB ABC reference 5 When attached to a 3 phase node in the circuit this node becomes the master node with phase sequence ABC The other nodes will adapt this setting DEF reference When attached to a 3 phase node in the circuit this node becomes the master node with phase sequence DEF The other nodes will adapt this setting A combination of ABC and DFEF references 1s possible for e g in 6 phase circuits 4 2 9 2 Branch Linear This menu contains linear branch components Resistor The name and the icon of linear branch objects as well as a brief description of Gepe the components are given next in tabulated form Inductor BLC Data parameters and node names to all components can be specified on the FUG yan Attributes tab of the generalized Component dialog box see Fig 4 41 a which A tn is displayed when you click on the component s icon with the right mouse button j in the circuit window C
172. h T D 0 32 DC resistance 0 0585 km Outside diameter of the conductors 3 105 cm The sky wires are made from steel reinforced conductors so it can also be assumed to be tubular with T D 0 187 DC resistance 0 304 Q km Outside diameter of the ground wires 1 6 cm Loading the LIN750_1 LIN into ATP_LCC the Line Model and the Conductor card windows are as shown in Fig 6 31 and in Fig 6 32 The JMarti setup input file generated when you activate the ATP Create data case command of the ATP_LCC is shown below BEGIN NEW DATA CASE JMARTI SETUP SERASE LINE CONSTANTS ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 191 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Line Cable Manual METRIC I1 32 0585 4 3 105 17 5 219 IREF 60 45 4 2 32 0585 4 3 105 O 219 T3 60 45 4 3 a32 0585 4 3 105 17 5 27 9 I a 60 45 4 O 187 304 4 1 6 13 2 41 05 26 15 O O O 0 187 304 4 1 6 i is 41 05 26 15 O O O BLANK CARD ENDING CONDUCTOR CARDS 20 5000 1 84 6 O 1 20 50 1 84 6 O 1 20 05 1 84 6 O 7 10 1 0 BLANK CARD ENDING FREQUENCY CARDS BLANK CARD ENDING LINE CONSTANT 0 O 0 O 0 1 30 1 0 1 30 1 1 ais SPUNCH BLANK JMARTI BEGIN NEW DATA CASE BLANK CARD Line Model J Marti F Metric unit M High accuracy FCAR 20 5000 Rhofohmm 20 Freq tz 9 Seg ground nm Dist km 84 6 Freq SS Hz Transposed PNT Freq init Hz 0 05 l Real matrix TR l Default Fitting ZC NexMis 0 EpsTol T leCode r IfDat r ifwta F InEli
173. h as group number and hide and lock state Default component attributes are stored in support files Access to create and customize support files is provided by the objects menu Components are connected if their nodes overlap or if a connection is drawn between the nodes To draw a connection between nodes click on a node with the left mouse button A line is drawn between that node and the mouse cursor Click the left mouse button again to place the connection clicking the right button cancels the operation The gridsnap facility helps overlapping the nodes Nodes connected together are given the same name by the Make Names and Make File options in the ATP menu Nodes can be attached along a connection as well as at connection end points A connection should not unintentionally cross other nodes what you see is what you get A node naming warning appears during the ATP file creation if a connection exists between nodes of different names or if the same name has been given to unconnected nodes Connections are selectable as any other object To resize a connection click on its end point with the left mouse button hold down and drag If several connections share the same node the desired connection to resize must be selected Selected connection nodes appear as squares at both ends of the selection rectangle 4 2 8 2 On Main Window The option On Main Window calls the help window and displays the help information related to the menu options o
174. hanges to Ciatpdrwnl cir Exa _1 cir Fig 4 5 Confirmation is needed to close an unsaved circuit 4 2 1 8 Import Selecting this field results in the same Open dialog box as shown in Fig 4 3 The user must specify a circuit file to load into the current circuit window The imported circuit is pasted into the existing one and appears in the circuit window as a group in marked moveable mode 4 2 1 9 Export Same as Save As but only the marked moveable part of the circuit is written to a circuit file 4 2 1 10 Save Metafile Windows 95 NT only Writes the selected objects of the active circuit to a disk file in Windows Metafile wmf format If no objects are selected the entire circuit window contents is written to disk This way even large circuits can be saved graphically without loss of resolution seen on the screen when the Zoom option is used to fit the circuit to the screen size Metafiles created by this command can be imported as picture into other Windows applications having filter available for this format 4 2 1 11 Save Bitmap Windows 3 x only Writes the selected objects of the active circuit into a Windows bitmap file bmp If no objects are selected the entire circuit window is written to disk This 16 bit version of ATPDraw supports only the bitmap representation of the circuit pictures which results in poorer resolution 4 2 1 12 Save Postscript Writes the objects in the active circuit window to a PostScri
175. hat case the text buffer will initially be empty 4 2 4 3 Make Names When this field is selected ATPDraw examines the current circuit and gives unique names to all nodes in the active circuit window Connected or overlapped nodes are given the same name User will be asked to confirm this operation While ATPDraw establishes the node names a Generating node names message is displayed in the middle of the current circuit window After the Make Names field has been selected the node name and phase sequence attributes in the Component dialog box and in the Node data window will be updated ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 65 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Reference Manual 4 2 4 4 Settings In the ATP Settings dialog box several options for the active circuit window can be specified Settings on this dialog are used when ATPDraw generates the ATP input file The dialog box has four pages such as the miscellaneous data card settings Simulation Integer Switch and the File format settings Simulation settings Simulation delta T 5 0E 0005 Tmax Xopt Thies 5 0E 0002 sopt jo eooo Copt 0 COPE Fig 4 14 Simulation settings Integer settings Integer IOUT jour 500 eae i IPLOT DOUBLE fi kssour f IDOUBLE MAKOUT I Pun fo KSSOUT MEMSAVE 0 caT fi NENERG 0 Fig 4 15 Integer settings MAXOUT IPUN MEMSAVE ICAT NENERG ATPDraw version 1 for Windows delta T Time step
176. he most important menu field in this window is the Jnclude which gives the name and path of the file to be included The Browse button allows you to select a file in the file Open dialog box The Send Parameters check box must be off Label and Comment are optional fields If you click with the right mouse button on one of the 3 phase reference objects a similar dialog appears with the difference that it has node name fields too ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 120 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Advanced Manual The Label menu is the only input variable having a meaning in this window along with the node names The nclude field should be left empty The reference objects are not represented in the ATP data file but serve only as visualization of connectivity The ATPDraw generated ATP file is shown below BEGIN NEW DATA CASE C Generated by ATPDRAW Tue 30 Jun 1998 C A Bonneville Power Administration program C Programmed by H K H idalen at EFI NORWAY 1994 1997 SDUMMY AY AUOO C Miscellaneous Data Card Cc aT gt x Tmax gt lt Xopt gt lt Copt gt 000001 S001 500 il il 1 1 0 0 1 0 C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 C 34567890123456789012345678 9012345678 9012345678 90123456789012345678901234567890 BRANCH C lt n 1 gt lt n 2 gt lt refl gt lt ref2 gt lt R gt lt L gt lt C gt C lt n lo lt n 2 gt lt refl gt lt ref2 gt lt R 2 lt A gt lt B S lt leng gt lt gt lt gt 0 x0011A 10 O X0011B 10 O
177. he selected grounding conditions NGRND 0 None grounded 2 All armor grounded 3 All sheaths and armors grounded 4 Individual grounding conditions 6 10 3 Cable system with enclosing pipe This selection specifies a cable system consisting of single core SC coaxial cables enclosed by a conducting pipe referred as class B type in the ATP Rule Book 3 The cable system might be located underground or in the air Settings on the Cable type and on the Output tabs are exactly the same as in the case of single core cables see in the previous section 6 10 2 Pipe data tab Pipe data Pipe data RP1 m RP2 m RP3 m Rhofohmm mu eps epse ps PB Per FB Special cases M Snaking M Infinite thick pipe M Grounded Location Center m f Fig 6 26 Pipe data settings RP1l inner radius of pipe conductor RP2 outer radius of pipe conductor ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 187 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Line Cable Manual RPS outer radius of outer insulator Rho resistivity of pipe conductor ohm ma relative permeability of pipe conductor eps1 relative permittivity of inner insulator eps2 relative permittivity of outer insulator Special cases Snaking transposition of the cables within the enclosing pipe Infinite thick pipe ISYST 0 and NGRND lt gt 4 uniform grounding Grounded When selected all armors as well as the pipe is assumed to be grounded Center distance between ground surface and
178. he system must be specified in tabbed notebook style dialog boxes This notebook has 2 tabs for a line constant case and 5 tabs for cable systems Depending on the simulated cable system some of the tabs might be inactive I e if there is no enclosing pipe in your cable system the Pipe data tab will be inactive so when you click on such a tab it will not come to the front and parameters can not be modified ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 171 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Line Cable Manual The structure of the line and cable data windows and the interpretation of input field parameters are described in the last two sections of this manual 6 6 2 Zoom fit The conductor or cable geometry of the system is drawn in the middle of the main window The function of the Zoom fit command is to adjust the drawing to the actual size of the main window The toolbar icon also executes this command Enlarging the drawing is also supported To activate this feature click inside the drawing with the left mouse button and the graphics of the line or cable system will be enlarged by one step around the mouse cursor location If you need further enlargement click the mouse again The X and Y coordinates of the actual mouse cursor location are displayed and updated continuously in the lower right corner of the main window while you move the mouse 6 6 3 Copy graphics When this command is executed the bitmap representation of the line or cable sy
179. heck box on the General page of the Tools Options menu This feature can be used for many different purposes in ATP simulation e g running ATP within ATPDraw processing simulation results by TPPLOT PCPlot or PlotX Y launching supporting programs like LCC for Line Cable constant support or any other data assembler It must be noted however that it is always the user s responsibility to provide the internal commands of that batch files in the correct format Inexperienced users are requested to read chapter 2 9 of the Installation Manual which describes how to create these batch files for different applications 4 2 5 Objects In this menu the user can customize the component support files and create new one Circuit objects in ATPDraw can be divided in 4 categories 1 Standard components 2 User specified components Include 3 MODELS components 4 TACS components Each object has a support file containing all information about data and nodes the graphical representation of the object icon and the associated help file Each circuit object has a name internally in ATPDraw equal to the name of the support file The support files have extension SUP and are stored in a directory dependent on the object type The full path to the support files are included in the data structure of the circuit files so the user can store the SUP files anywhere he likes but the usage of the directory structure given below is recommended to ensu
180. ialog box appears In this case the Data tab does not exist so only the Node settings need to be specified ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 159 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Advanced Manual In this window you must specify a name of each nodes in the Name field the number of Phases HW BUS 3 2 TEET 1 or 3 and the node position on the icon border Lv BIS 3 i Codes for the available node positions are shown TY BUS J F 45 6 in the icon at right in Fig 5 39 Fig 5 39 Node window of the new object The names of the nodes do not have to be the same as the names used in the DBM punch file but the sequence of the nodes must be the same as used in the ARG card 5 8 4 Creating icon Each user specified component can have an icon which represents the object on the screen and an optional on line help which describes the meaning of the parameters These properties can be edited using the built in Help and Icon Editors The button and the button at the right hand side of the New User Specified dialog box is used to call the help and the icon editor All the functions and menus of the editor are described in the Reference part so this information is not repeated here The icon specified as the graphical representation of the new BCTRAN object on the screen is shown in Fig 5 40 Icon Editor Of x Fig 5 40 The icon specified for the BCTRAN object When you have finished the icon drawing click on the Done button
181. icator in the status bar becomes MODE MOVE LABEL The user can now click on a label hold the left mouse button down and drag the label to a desired position The operation ends when you finish moving the label and release the mouse button Short key Ctrl L In many cases the component labels and node names are not overlapping the component icons In such cases they can be moved by a simple left click on the label then by holding the left mouse button down and dragging So the Move Label command is most frequently used when labels are located close to or behind the component icons and can not be selected otherwise 4 2 2 13 Rotate A marked object or a group of objects are rotated 90 degrees counter clock wise when this field is selected This operation can also be performed by clicking the right mouse button inside the selected region Short key Ctrl R 4 2 2 14 Flip Flips the selected objects by rotating them 180 degrees Short key Ctrl F 4 2 2 15 Reload icons The command reads and displays component icons from their respective support files This function is useful when the support file icons have been redesigned and the user wants the changes to be reflected in the circuit window 4 2 2 16 Comment Opens a comment dialog box where three lines of text can be written as comments to the active circuit as shown in Fig 4 8 This command also enables you to change the circuit comment if it already exists This three comment l
182. ide because the purpose of ATP_LCC is very similar to that of the ATPDraw itself 1 e to provide a graphical user interface While the ATPDraw has the functionality to create ATP input files for the time and frequency domain simulations ATP_LCC prepares such files for the line constant or cable constant calculations ATP_LCC is written in Borland Delphi 1 0 which is a 16 bit compiler so ATP_LCC is running on all MS Windows compatible operating systems This chapter includes installation manual as well as user s guide for ATP_LCC 6 1 Introduction In the ATP_LCC the user specifies the geometrical and physical data for an overhead line or a cable system in input windows The program consists of two parts one for LINE CONSTANTS support and one for CABLE CONSTANTS These two parts are handled independently in the program with separate input windows The geometrical and electrical data of the system can be specified in tabbed notebook style dialog boxes consisting of two pages for overhead lines and five pages for cables These windows appear when you select the New Line or New Cable option in the File menu or when an existing line cable data file is selected in the Open dialog of the File menu For later modification the input data can be saved to disk files with the default extension LIN for lines and CBL for cables The specified line and cable geometries are drawn in the main window Zooming in and out Operations are supported as well
183. iles for user specified components View ATP Two groups of option settings can be initiated on the View ATP page as shown on Fig 4 31 These are the default view and ATP options View ATP The Edit options button opens the View Options dialog which enables you to specify view options to apply as default to all new circuit Se Ue W Giants windows Available options are described in section 4 2 3 8 The Edit settings button calls the ATP settings dialog described in section 4 2 4 4 of this manual Default ATP settings Note that all circuit windows maintain their own set of view options Edit settings and only the circuit windows opened from this time on will use the options specified here To change the view options of existing circuit windows select the View Options menu Fig 4 31 Setting default view and ATP options Note that all circuits have their own settings stored together with the objects in the circuit file The settings you specify here will only be used by the new circuit files To customize ATP settings of an existing circuit select the Settings option in the ATP menu 4 2 6 5 Save Options Saves program options to the ATPDraw ini file This file is normally located in the program installation directory and can be used to store default option settings At the end of the Reference Manual a complete description of ATPDraw s INI file properties are given 4 2 7 Window From the Window menu the
184. iles you want to include are located in different subdirectories As in this case where the nonlinear characteristics of the ZnO blocks are in the USP folder and the models description file is in the MOD folder To avoid conflicts you are advised to use the full path of all included files because ATPDraw does not support the PREFIX SUFFIX in such a combination This could result in some problems when exchanging ATPDraw circuit files with an other user who has installed the program in a different drive and or in a different directory but this can be solved under Tools Options Directories Alternatively this difficulty can be avoided by installing all include files in the same subdirectory called for example LIB The ATP file of Fig 5 31 is listed below The cards marked bold 2nd integer miscellaneous card RECORD in MODELS and PRINTER PLOT cards are added to the file using the Edit file option in the ATP menu The direction of rotation of the source must also be changed B lt C since DC68 DAT uses a negative sequence AC source rotation BEGIN NEW DATA CASE C Generated by ATPDRAW Tue 30 Jun 1998 C A Bonneville Power Administration program C Programmed by H K H idalen at EFI NORWAY 1994 1997 C Miscellaneous Data Card POWER FREQUENCY 60 C adr gt lt Tmax gt lt Xopt gt lt Copt gt 00005 05 60 1 9 1 3 1 1 0 1 0 5 5 20 20 100 100 MODELS INPUT IX0001 v CR30A IX0002 v CR20A IX0003 1i CRZ2A
185. image of the icon being edited In the color palette the color marked with a capital letter T is the transparent color To select a color from the palette click either the left or the right mouse button in one of the color boxes The selected color will be assigned to the mouse button you clicked until you use the same mouse button to select another color Two boxes on the left hand side of the palette indicate the current color selection The leftmost box displays the color currently assigned to the left mouse button The one to the right ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 14 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Reference Manual displays the color assigned to the right mouse button It is common to think of these two boxes as indicators of current foreground leftmost and background rightmost color selection The foreground color is normally used to draw with and the background color to erase any mistakes made during the drawing It is therefore convenient to assign the transparent color indicated by 7 to the right mouse button and desired drawing color to the left button Mistakes can then easily be corrected by alternating left right mouse button clicks Drawing in the icon buffer can be accomplished by clicking the left or right mouse button The olive colored vertical and horizontal lines indicate the icon node positions These are the same positions as indicated on the Node page of the Edit Component dialog box The icon editor has
186. ines are written to the header section of the ATP file created by ATPDraw if the Comments option is selected in the ATP Settings menu To display the circuit comment at the bottom of the circuit window select the Comment Line option in the View menu Circuit Comments x Example 1 Your first circuit Rectifier bridge OK Fig 4 8 Circuit comment dialog box ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 60 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Reference Manual In the View menu you can control the visibility of several main and circuit Toolbar window components and you can select how the circuit is drawn in the 7 Baue Ber current window The popup menu appearing after a click in the View main Comment Line i F menu field is shown in Fig 4 9 oom In foom Out Zoom Retresh Uptions Fig 4 9 View menu 4 2 3 1 Toolbar Shows or hides the toolbar at the top of the main window The toolbar contains speed buttons for the most frequently used menu options The following list describes available speed buttons CI Opens an empty circuit window A Loads a circuit file into a new window z Saves the objects in the active circuit window to disk Saves the objects in the active circuit window to a specified disk file m Inserts a circuit from file into the active circuit window H Saves the selected objects of the active circuit to a disk file Cancels the last edit operation Cancels the last undo
187. ing Electric arc simulation using MODELS LINE CABLE CONSTANTS MANUAL How to get the program How to install ATP LCC How to create circuits with line cable data Line cable constant application examples ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 11 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Introduction 1 6 Manual conventions The following typographical conventions are used in this manual Italic Menus in ATPDraw E g Select Edit Rotate Select Rotate command in the pop up menu Edit Courier 9 10 Data files E g Listing of ATP files MODELS code etc Courier 11 12 Data code and file names E g Give the file the name HVDC_6 LIB and store it in the USP directory The USP directory is a directory under the main directory of ATPDraw Courier 12 Commands on the DOS prompt E g C TMP gt setup Type the command setup at C TMP gt The following file conventions are used in this manual Circuit file ATP file Include file Support file Model file The files in which ATPDraw stores the information about the constructed circuits ATPDraw can load a circuit file and display the equivalent graphical picture on the screen The circuit file is a binary file in the Windows version that can not be edited by text processors The default extension of the circuit files is CIR These files are stored in the CIR sub directory but this 1s completely user selectable This is the file produced by ATPDraw and c
188. internally so you do not need to run ATP to compile a LIB file which then will be Includ ed at the simulation This module thus makes it possible to include overhead lines and cables efficiently in ATPDraw 5 5 1 Creating Line Constants data files This example shows how to create frequency dependent JMarti line models and how to interface them with ATPDraw as an Overhead Line PCH object To use this feature the user must be familiar with the usage of the LINE CONSTANTS and the JMARTI SETUP supporting routines of ATP see in 3 A completely new program called ATP_LCC has been developed to perform this task easily for the user see Section 6 Line Cable Manual of this book In this program the user specifies the cross section data and material data for an overhead line or a cable Based on this data the ATP_LCC generates an input file in the correct format for the LINE CONSTANT or JMARTI SETUP support of ATP As a result ATP produces a punch output PCH file ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 131 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Advanced Manual The example line is a 138 miles long 500 kV overhead line from John Day to Lower Monumental taken from the benchmark DCN3 DAT in ATP The JMarti setup file JMARTI_1 ATP created by the ATP_LCC program see Chapter 6 of this manual is printed below BEGIN NEW DATA CASE JMARTI SETUP SERASE LINE CONSTANTS ENGLISH 1 364 05215 4 LGU 20475 SP a 1 364 05215 4 Lw602 lo 2s
189. ip Ctrl F Edit Flip Group Ctrl G Edit Select group or left double click in open space All Ctrl A Edit Select All Label Ctrl L Edit Move Label UNDO Alt BkSp Edit Undo REDO Shft Alt BkSp Edit Redo Zoom In Out View Zoom In Out Zoom window Z View Zoom ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 32 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Introductory Manual 3 6 Overview of the operation of ATPDraw From the Component selection menu you select components to insert into the circuit This menu pops up when you click the right mouse button in an empty area of the circuit window To select and move an object simply press and hold down the left mouse button on the object while you move the mouse Release the button and click in an empty area to unselect and confirm its new position The object is then moved to the nearest grid point known as gridsnapping If two or more components overlap as a consequence of a move operation you are given a warning message and can choose to proceed or cancel the operation Selecting a group of objects for moving can be done in three ways If you hold down the Shift key while you left click on an object you add it to the selected objects group Pressing and holding down the left mouse button in an empty area enables you to drag a rectangular outline around the objects you want to select And finally if you double click the left mouse button in an empty area you can define a polygon shaped region by
190. is included with Include and a limited number of additional components e g switches are added Node names internally in the Include file must be the same as those used in the ATPDraw data case F1 F4 left adjusted in this example The data case can then be sent to a person whose knowledge about ATP is rather limited This person can run the case manipulate the switches and establish the ground fault current along a transmission line eg for relay setting purposes Any user specified objects can be used as a simple Include library Send Param button off but a predefined object is available under the User Specified field in the selection menu Two other special objects are also available the LibRef_1 and LibRef_3 These objects are not written in the ATP file at all and their purpose is only to visualize a connectivity in the Include file An example where these objects Library LIB1 A B and 3 phase reference LIBREF_3 have been used is shown in Fig 5 7 LIB1 A 5 Fig 5 7 Usage of a library reference objects EXA_5 CIR If you click the right mouse button on the Library object identified by the LIB1 A B label you get the input window to set the element attributes as shown in Fig 5 8 Group No fo Label LIB1 A B Comment study of ground fault in line A B User specified Send parameters M Hide Include ATPORAWUSPYLIB Browse A aAa F Lock a phase aoe Fig 5 8 Library input window T
191. is a workaround function that corrects a problem which may appear with some display adapters when a polygon is moved outside the left or upper edge of the screen Note that the last two parameters cannot be set from the Tools Options dialog box If you experience problems during polygon drawing operations try to set one or both parameters to On using a text editor Parameters accepting the boolean values On or Off True False 1 or 0 are also accepted Default settings AutoSave Off AutoSavelnterval 5 CreateBackupFile Off SaveWindowSizePos On SaveWindowState Offt SaveToolbarState On SavestatusBarState On SaveComment LineState Off Win31DialogStyle 0ff SaveOnExit Off PolyDots Off PolyBug OLrft ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 105 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Reference Manual Preferences Parameter Range Description UndoBuffers 1 100 The number of undo redo buffers to allocate for each circuit window BackgroundColor The background color of circuit windows You can specify one of the system color identifiers or a numeric value to set the red green and blue color intensity TextEditor Full path of text editor program to use for ATP file editing If this parameter is an empty string default the built in text editor is used Default settings UndoBuffers 10 BackgroundColor Window TextEditor Directories Parameter Range Description Circuits The directory where you store your circuit files cir ATP Spe
192. is to be hoped however that even experienced users of ATP will find the program useful for documentation of circuits and exchanging data cases with other users The possibility of building up libraries of circuits and sub circuits makes ATPDraw a powerful tool in transients analysis of electric power systems The ATPDraw package also includes the ATP_LCC program for Line Cable constants support and a utility that makes possible the usage of existing circuit files created by the previous DOS GIGS versions of the program under the new environment The program is written in Borland Pascal Two functionally very similar versions of ATPDraw exist A 32 bit version which is written in Borland Delphi 2 0 runs only under Windows 95 NT and a 16 bit version compiled with Borland Delphi 1 0 for Windows 3 x ATPDraw is a trademark and copyrighted by 1996 1997 SINTEF Energy Research Trondheim Norway It is programmed and maintained by Dr Hans Kr H idalen The program was redesigned and converted to Windows by O G Dahl Dahl Data Design Norway The ATPDraw for Windows program is royalty free and can be downloaded free of charge from the ftp server ftp ece mtu edu user anonymous password your e mail address The proprietary rights of the program belong the Bonneville Power Administration USA the company who financed the program development and to SINTEF Energy Research formerly EFI Norway The contact person at BPA is Mr James L Hall Any r
193. isting CIR TICS vccssccscsasetastansnecsoacentoeseaasdetnesandasvennsoaracaandesnenasdaarenanertosocatobieceadoviatboneateas 18 2 7 1 Installation of the CONVERT Wty sscnicdedevenenndaeuataneazeadeddactadovisvaseas esesadasiactadoniavesensdaesaioniness 18 DUO COS C CONVER T ee E E ENO 18 2 7 3 Converting very old Version 2 X circuit FICS eee ccccccccscccceseeesssesseeecececcceeeeessaaeessseseeeeeeeeeeeess 19 LORON OCU i ao cisaccaraescimasta ee tetra siea carat Seaton selene ies aa E exaieeeetannenteceosesldecusuiadeatuneace 19 De TNO EAS E e Speers etc E AE EE TE ENEE A ENA 19 2 0 2 Help from the a thor of A TPDiAW censier ieri EAT EEEE EEEE 20 2 9 Running ATP and other utilities from ATPDraw in version 1 2 and ADOVE cccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseees 20 2 9 1 How to run ATP directly from ATPDraw ccccccccccccccccccseeseeeesseseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeasaesessesseeeeeeeeeeeess 20 29 2 HOw to execute TPPLOT from A TPO ray 2 seass cus ceasetiusatanietasedianadoasvdetavinaciapianiordesteviataetaeaasanians 21 2 9 3 How to execute PCPLOT PlotX Y and LCC from ATPDraw ec cecceeccesceeccescesceeees 22 210 ATP related nernet TES OULC CS aines nie EES EEEE DEE OEE Dia Eustat 22 DAN A VNC TONE Aa a a E E TO T ZZ ZOD TALP EEP IN R E E sonar ecetassanastancsedseaseeecuticananact 23 LAS N OEN de W Dee e E A O E E E 24 J lntoductory Mamadali sessascasssncsnesescsenvsseandasanasnesescendus eniga era E An en ap iein hip EAn is 25 Ded Operan
194. it windows of ATPDraw User will be asked to save any modified circuits before the application is terminated 4 2 2 Edit This menu contains the various edit facilities of circuit objects in Undo Overlap Alt BkSp ATPDraw The Edit popup menu is shown in Fig 4 7 Redo Overlap Shitt Alt Bkop Cut Shift Del Objects or group of objects have to be selected before any edit Copy Ctrl Ins operations can be performed on them If the user clicks on an Paste E object with the left mouse button in the circuit window it will be Duplicate Ctrl D Copy as Metafile Delete Del select Group Ltrl G Select All Ctrl A Unselect Cirl l Move Label Cirl L Rotate Cirl h Flip Ctrl F Reload Icons rounded by a rectangular frame indicating the object is selected Comment Fig 4 7 Edit menu ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 57 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Reference Manual 4 2 2 1 Undo Redo Undo cancels the last edit operation Redo cancels the last undo command Short key for Undo Redo Alt Backspace and Shift Alt Backspace The number of operations that can be undone redone depends on the Undo redo Buffers property setting on the Preferences page of the Tools Options menu Default value is 10 Almost all object manipulation functions object create delete move rotate etc can be undone or redone Changes made to the circuit data in the component dialog box are also supported by the Undo redo functions These functions
195. itch T 3 Switch T 3i Switch voc Diode Valve TACS switch Measuring Pies ole Statistic switch SEITEN OVINE Fig 4 46 Supported switch type ATP components ATPDraw supports most of the switch type elements in ATP such as ordinary time or voltage controlled switches options for modeling diodes valves and triacs as well as Statistics systematics switches The popup menu contains the following items ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 93 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Reference Manual Switch T 1 SWITCHTC gt SWITCH Time controlled switch type O Switch T 3 SWITCH_3 SWITCH Three phase time controlled switch type O symmetric 3 phase nodes Switch T 3i SWIT XI SWITCH Three phase time controlled switch type 0 non symmetric 3 phase nodes Switch V c SWITCHVC _ gt _ SWITCH Voltage controlled switch type 0 Pinte oroe p SWITCH Diode Switch type 11 Uncontrolled type 11 Valve VALVE ny SWITCH Valve Thyristor Switch type 11 type 11 TACS MODELS controlled TACS switch TACSSWIT SWITCH Simple TACS MODELS controlled type 13 switch Measuring SWMEAS SWITCH Measuring switch type O Current measurements Type 12 TRIAC Bh SWITCH Double TACS MODELS controlled lt type 12 switch Statistic switch STATSWIT s SWITCH Statistic switch a See ATP Switch settings Systematic switch SYSTSWIT s SWITCH Systematic switch a See ATP Switch settings 4
196. ively in a substation lightning protection study The one line diagram of the investigated 400 kV substation is drawn in Fig 5 34 LINE1 15 LINE2 15 LINE4 LINES 15 LINES 17 TR Conventiona gapped arrester N whe Fig 5 34 The one line diagram of the substation ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 150 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Advanced Manual The figures written to the buses give the length of each section in meters The circuit breakers drawn as empty boxes are assumed to be disconnected so in that configuration only two transmission lines are connected to the transformer which is protected by a conventional gapped arrester The simulated incident is a single phase backflashover arising 1 2 km away from the substation which was assumed to be caused by a 100 kAmps 2 50 us direct lightning to the ground wire The ATPDraw circuit of the complete network substationt incoming line is shown in Fig 5 35 c c c H Fig 5 35 Example circuit EXA_9 cir The single circuit overhead line spans in the vicinity of the lightning stroke have been represented by four wire JMarti lines The surge propagation along the transmission tower and the response of the tower grounding have been approximated by a single phase constant parameter transmission line and lumped R L branches The JMarti line was included in ATPDraw via the Overhead Line PCH objects again as it was shown earlier The lib
197. ize button will then be replaced with a resize button One more click on this button will bring the window back to its previous size Corners Click on the corner hold down and drag to resize the window Main menu The main menu provides access to all the functions offered by ATPDraw The menu items are explained in detail in the reference part of this manual File Load and save circuit files start a new one import export circuit files create postscript and metafile bitmap files print the current circuit and exit Edit Circuit editing copy paste delete duplicate flip rotate select move label copy graphics to clipboard and undo redo etc View Tool bar status bar and comment line on off zoom refresh and view options ATP Create node names make ATP file edit ATP file ATP file settings miscellaneous cards and file formats file sorting etc running batch jobs Objects Edit support files default values min max limits icon and help file create new files for MODELS and User Specified Objects Tools Icon editor help file editor text editor setting of various program options Window Arranging of the circuit windows Map window Help About box and Windows help file system Circuit window The circuit is built up in this window The circuit window is the container of circuit objects From the file menu you can load circuit objects from disk or simply create an empty window to start building a new circuit Circuit obje
198. le by a new row and the parameters of the previous last row are copied automatically into the new one Before deleting the last row confirmation is needed as shown in Fig 6 11 Rows inside the table can also be deleted but they must be dragged to the last row first To drag a row click on its identifier in the first column hold the button down and drag the selected row to a new location Are You Sure You Yrant to DELETE the Row 8 2 row to be deleted must first be dragged down as last row klick on left column hold button down drag and release Fig 6 11 Deleting a row needs confirmation When you completed parameter settings on the Line model tab as well as on the Conductor card click on the OK button to return to the main window of ATP LCC The Line data window can be re opened again as many times as needed using the Edit data command in the Edit menu or by a left mouse click on the Edit toolbar icon To obtain on line help select the Help button at any time ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 175 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Line Cable Manual 6 9 1 Constant parameter line model The line is assumed to be transposed and line parameters surge impedance travel time will be calculated at a given frequency A short description of parameters is given under the Fig 6 12 Line Model Constant parmeter M Metric unit Rho ohmm Freq Hz 100090 M Seg ground Dist km a l Transposed Real m
199. le is generated ready to be processed by ATP for creation of punched output PCH file In most cases ATPDraw can read these punch files and create a LIB file equivalent with the output of the Data Base Modul routine ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 103 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Reference Manual Selecting Overhead Line PCH the program performs an Open Punch File dialog in which the available PCH files are listed If you select a file from the list and click Open ATPDraw interprets the file see Fig 4 53 and generates a LIB file in the USP sub folder for the recognized file types exactly the same way as it were created by the Data Base Modularization File type KCLee File type JMlarti Library data successfully written to Number of phases z Number of phases 3 Coa TPORYWA TUS Test LUB Cancel Cancel Cancel Fig 4 53 Interpretation results are communicated in dialog boxes When the LIB file is written successfully the icon of the just created new LCC component appears in the middle of the circuit window i 4 2 10 Shortcut menu The Shortcut menu provides access to the most frequently used object manipulation functions To show and activate the shortcut menu hold down the Shift key while you click the right mouse button on an object or a selected group of objects in the circuit window Open Open enables component customization by bringing up the Component dialog box of the object
200. lumped resistance models called as Clarke type in the ATP Rule Book Five different types are supported Transp lines 1 LINEATA BRANCH Single phase distributed parameter 1 ph type 1 line KCLee Clarke model Transp lines 1 LINEZT_2 BRANCH Two phase distributed parameter 2 ph type 1 2 transposed line Clarke model ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 92 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Reference Manual Transp lines 1 LINEZT_3 zzl BRANCH Three phase distributed parameter 3 ph type 1 3 transposed line Clarke model Transp lines 1 LINEZT_6 Six phase distributed parameter 6 ph transposed line Clarke model Two parallel 3 phase lines with mutual coupling Nine phase distributed parameter 9 ph type 1 9 transposed line Clarke model Nonsym lines These line models are some sort of dummy lines No data is written to the ATP file only the node names are specified in between the separators Parameters of that nonsymmetrical lines are generated outside ATPDraw The popup menu has three selections available Nonsym lines LINELC_3 BRANCH Three phase dummy line 3 ph aa Node names only 3 phase nodes Nonsym lines LINELC_6 BRANCH Six phase dummy line 6 ph aa Node names only 3 phase nodes Nonsym lines LINELC_9 BRANCH Nine phase dummy line 9 ph Ea Node names only 3 phase nodes 4 2 9 6 Switches Switch T 1 Sw
201. ly side networks connecting to the 750 kV transmission line at the sending end and at the receiving end are rather simple Only the positive sequence short circuit capacity of the supplies has been taken into account by 3 phase RLC objectc connected parallel with a resistor representing the equivalent surge impedance seen from the terminals An uncoupled series reactance simulates the short circuit inductance of the transformer bank consisting of three single phase units The shunt reactors which are also single phase devices have been represented by linear RLC components because the predicted amplitude of the reactor voltages are far below the saturation level of the air gapped core The arc resistance of the fault is assumed to be constant and as an approximation 2 ohms were applied in the study The ATPDraw generated file for this 750 kV example circuit is listed below BEGIN NEW DATA CASE C Generated by ATPDRAW Tue 30 Jun 1998 C A Bonneville Power Administration program C Programmed by H K H idalen at EFI NORWAY 1994 1997 SPREFIX C ATPDRAW USP SOUFP IX LIS SDUMMY XYZOOO C Miscellaneous Data Card C dT gt lt Tmax gt lt Xopt gt lt Copt gt 00002 25 500 5 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 Q 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890 BRANCH C lt 4 toe gosrelloarerZ gt lt R lt bL Fac gt C lt n Tos m 2 gt lt refl gt lt ref2 gt lt R 2 lt A gt lt B S lt b
202. m mz NorMax i IfPlot mz Al NexMis gt EpstTol lita M InElim NorMax cal F IfPlot Fig 6 31 Line Model window for the case LIN750_1 LIN T leCode T tat Conductor card a 3 105 17 5 13 45 0 0565 3 105 0 13 45 Alpha NB deg 0 0585 3 105 14 5 13 45 0 304 1 6 13 2 26 15 0 0 304 1 6 13 2 26 15 0 Fig 6 32 Conductor card window for the case LIN750_1 LIN ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 192 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Line Cable Manual 7 References 1 ATPDRAW version 3 User Manual TR A4389 EFI Norway 1996 2 Ned Mohan Computer Exercises for Power Electronic Education 1990 Department of Electrical Engineering University of Minnesota 3 ATP EMTP Rule Book Canadian American EMTP Users Group 1997 4 Laurent Dube MODELS in ATP Language manual February 1996 ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 193
203. n as it is indicated by the scroll bars of each circuit window 4 2 1 2 Open This field performs a Windows standard Open dialog box shown in Fig 4 3 where the user can select a circuit file and load it into the ATPDraw Short key Ctr O Open Circuit Look in H Cir r Eg 21x E Exa_1 cir Ja Exe 2 cir ely E sa_3 cir E Exa_4ocir oly Exa S cir Ja Exe 6 cir Exa rci Ja E sa_8 cir 42KB 34KB ek PokE ook ook ek 114K6 CIA File CIA File CIF File CIA File CIA File CIA File CIA File CIA File 1397 1997 1397 1397 1397 1397 1397 1397 15 02 15 02 15 02 15 02 15 02 15 02 15 02 le 16 12 Files of type Circuit files cir Cancel Fig 4 3 Open file window Win95 style ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 54 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Reference Manual This Open Save dialog box is used for several different selections in the main menu An alternative MS Windows 3 1 style is also supported as shown in Fig 4 4 There is a check box in the Tools Options menu to switch between supported alternatives Open Circuit Px File name Folders cit chatodrwnl Cir _ Cancel mc E3 atpdrwn y Cir List files of type Drives Circuit tiles cir E c w95 sys x Fig 4 4 Open file window Win 3 1 style The existing circuit files in the CIR subfolder of ATPDraw are shown below the File name field A
204. n the ATP file without any modification by ATPDraw The model file must have the extension MOD and be stored in the MOD sub directory ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 12 ATPDraw oe for Windows version 1 0 2 Installation Manual ATPDraw for Windows 1 0 ATPDraw version 1 for Windows ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Installation Manual 2 1 How to get the program The ATPDraw program can be found anonymously on the ftp sever at ftp ece mtu edu IP 141 219 23 120 in the directory pub atp gui atpdraw Username anonymous Password your full E mail address and on the European mirror server at ftp rrzn uni hannover de IP 130 75 2 2 in the directory pub mirror atp gui atpdraw Username anonymous Password your full E mail address For inexperienced Internet users a short guide about the application of these tools and a summary of ATP related Internet resources are given in section 2 10 of the Installation Manual There are two subdirectories under the ATPDraw directory of the above servers ad_win32 for the 32 bit version and ad_win16 for the 16 bit version running under Windows 95 NT and Windows 3 x respectively Both directories contain a self extracting archive ad_win32 exe and ad_winl6 exe a short installation guide and the latest patch file f any When you successfully downloaded the distribution kit follow the installation steps shown below The installation slightly depends
205. n the Main menu of ATPDraw for Windows 4 2 8 3 About ATPDraw Selecting this field the ATPDraw s copyright and version information page will be displayed About ATPDraw x AT POraw Windows wersion 1 1 Copyright 1996 199 SINTEF EFI Graphical pre processor ta ATP Bonneville Power Administration USA Programmed by H K H idalen EFl Morwas Converted to Windows by O G Dahl D Dahl Data Design Norway Fig 4 36 Information window about the program developers copyright owner and sponsoring institution and the program version actually used ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 84 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Reference Manual 4 2 9 Component selection menu The Component selection menu provides options for inserting new components into the circuit window The menu shown on Fig 4 37 is normally hidden To open and activate the menu click the right mouse button in an empty circuit window area In this menu all ATPDraw components are collected After a selection in one of the floating menus the selected object is drawn in the circuit window in marked moveable mode Probes amp iphase The upper four sections of the menu provide access to the probe splitter zienen Uneen and transposition objects and to many standard ATP components linear Branch Nonlinear and nonlinear elements switches sources transformers and machines Line Lumped Line Distributed The next section provide
206. n you close the dialog box a small a symbol appears on the top left side of the capacitor indicating the branch voltage and the current output requests ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 43 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Introductory Manual Next click with the right mouse button on the load resistor to get the input window and specify the load resistance to be equal to 20 Q Both branch current and voltage will be calculated so the kU gt I small symbol appears again on the top left side of the resistor after leaving the dialog box 3 7 1 5 Node names and grounding The final step of building this circuit is to give data to nodes node names and grounding All nodes will automatically receive names from ATPDraw so the user should normally only give names to nodes of special interest It is generally advisable to let the node naming process be the last step in building up a circuit This is to avoid undesirable multiple node names which is corrected by ATPDraw automatically but results in irritating warning messages To give data to a node you simply have to click on this node once with the right mouse button Fig 3 26 Fig 3 29 show how to give data to four different nodes To Pos l Ground M Display Fig 3 26 Click on a node with the right mouse button and specify a name in the dialog box When you exit the window in Fig 3 26 by clicking OK the circuit is updated as shown in Fig 3 27 All node n
207. ne W INOW S esre E ET 21 PaL N MAMAN WV O E E EE EEE NE E E zy Jo The C OmpOne Ml GIO DOr eaei E E EE N EE REEE E UREE Eni 30 eA Oe RAM Me mOUSE srine e et deidaatandsaiaeatanmsanausssatatnnderoauctgambssasianeciededauaraneiaseseotencessientavareuee 31 SR Oe BA MOINS EEEO EE E A A AE A E AE 32 3 6 Overview of the operation of ATPDIraw c ccscsseeeeecccceeeeeseeacaeeesssssseeeecceesessseaaaeeessssseseseeeeeeeees 33 L A EES T a a e a E S 34 JLA Boldin ECCU isss eap asee cer iaa aandie 35 3 1 1 Starine tO crede anew CM CUI orsin eenn aE E Ea PEE EAEE 35 A EAS ie E A E E IE EE E E E 35 Di a ep BDO GIG a A E E 39 PAA EO a E E E E E E E 42 3 LLS N de Names and SOUMCING 55 5 xecssasesacevecveudeasaenneedsaennansennaacetboetvorasidenidsaeneaaseroosedeaseenateananenet 44 APAS T e e E E n cates A EE E A E OE ETE E 45 S E AE a N ESE nr enat renee Tyree TT 45 3 7 4 Running ATP simulation in version 1 2 and ADOVE ccccccccccccccccsscnssseseeeesssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaaaaaeeeees 47 3 9 Three phasecircuits Lra 2Cr erorien rrai a e EE aE Ea LSE 48 ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 1 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 A ARES POMOC VIIA ss 5 clasacantwondvasatennasaaudosconstclus visstand lt a a 51 AINT N 600 mene Te PD Oo nD en vr ne ne eC ee eee 53 AN e 1 ee Oe aS Coan Pa vee de TS ee ee PTT 54 MeN MN AA E in sarees ess nas ieee ss ew ea essed oe aac Sea cine AEA E 54 g2 Me INV Wy cers cute ceca sestieec eatsesosesttasee osnscied
208. ng hand and a line is drawn between the starting position and the current mouse position the action mode now is MODE CONN END indicating that the program is waiting for the end point of the connection Click with the left mouse button again to place the connection or click with the right button to cancel the starting point Drawing the two connections required to parallel connecting the source inductance and the damping resistor is shown below Oke Opie ele wl Click left Click left Click left Click left Release move Release move The connections are always drawn with node dots if the Node dots is On in the View Options menu The last object we want to introduce in the source part of the circuit is a voltage measuring probe which results in an output request for the node voltage in the ATP file The voltage sensor can be selected via the Probes amp 3 phase Probe Volt in the component selection menu see Fig 3 9 The probe is drawn in the middle part of the circuit window in marked and moveable mode Use the left mouse button to drag and place the object as shown on the figure to the left When you place an object by clicking on open area of the circuit window you will sometimes receive a warning message as shown in Fig 3 10 This message appears if a center of one of the permanent objects is inside the enclosing polygon of a marked object or more general a group of objects This is to prevent a disaster if the user p
209. ng the current zoom factor by 20 percent Short key plus sign on the numeric keypad or key 4 2 3 5 Zoom Out Diminishes the objects in the active circuit window by reducing the current zoom factor by 20 percent Short key minus sign on the numeric or the standard key 4 2 3 6 Zoom Selecting this field brings up the Zoom dialog box shown in Fig 4 10 Short key Z In the Zoom dialog you can specify the zoom factor of the active circuit window The actual zoom factor is given in the input field at left in percent The normal view has a zoom factor of 100 percent To ZOOM in on circuit objects increase the zoom factor To zoom out and view a larger portion of the circuit decrease the factor Upper and lower limits are 400 and 25 percent respectively To accept current zoom factor setting and return from the Zoom dialog select the OK button To set a new zoom factor and view the result without returning select the Apply button Fig 4 10 The Zoom dialog box 4 2 3 7 Refresh Redraws all objects in the active circuit window No short key is assigned but this command can also be activated via the Toolbar icon 4 2 3 8 Options Selecting this field brings up the View Options dialog box shown in Fig 4 11 where the user can specify object visibility options View Options x M Components M Node dots M Tacs l Mode names 7 T Help I Models M Drag icon M Connections M No Data warning Apply M Relati
210. ngle you can move it around in the map window When you release the mouse button the circuit window displays the part of the circuit defined by the new rectangle size and position and the circuit window scrollbars are repositioned to reflect the updated circuit view If any circuit objects are currently selected when you reposition the map rectangle selected objects will also be moved and their relative position is retained in the new window This functionality can be used to move a collection of objects quickly to a relatively large distance You can show or hide the map selecting the Map Window option in the Window menu or by pressing the M key In the latter case the user can quickly enable it when it is needed or hide it when it conceals vital circuit window information ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 81 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Reference Manual 4 2 8 Help The Help menu option pulls down the commands related to the on line help available to the user of ATPDraw This menu contains an option for displaying the help topics and ATPDraw copyright and version information Help Help Topics On Main inco About ATPDraw Fig 4 34 Help menu ATPDraw s on line help is a standard Windows dialog which provides help on all Main menu options of the program and also gives a short introduction how to build up a circuit 4 2 8 1 Help Topics The Help Topics command invokes a standard Windows tabbed help dialog box Sever
211. nsformers When you select this option small symbols appear on the top left side of the objects icon indicating the branch output request To accept the current view options and return from the View Options dialog select the OK button To set and view the results of the new options without returning selected the Apply button If you want the current settings to be applied to all current and future circuit windows select the Apply All button before you exit the dialog box 4 2 4 ATP The ATP menu allows you to generate names for unnamed nodes to generate or edit the ATP file and specify ATP settings for the circuit Version 1 2 of the program also supports editing your batch jobs here The jobs you specify are listed immediately below the Edit batch jobs command The menu appearing after clicking on the ATP menu field is shown in Fig 4 12 ATP Make File Edit File Make Names settings Edit batch jobs Run ATF Run TRPPLOT Run PCP lot Run vy PCP lot Run Plots Run LEC Fig 4 12 The ATP menu ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 64 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Reference Manual 4 2 4 1 Make File Generates an ATP input file for the active circuit window The user will be asked to confirm the name of the file Default filename is the name of the current circuit file with atp extension ATPDraw first calls the make name procedure even if the Make Name has been previously selected then generates an
212. nt of another relation will initiate the drawing of a new relation Relations are used to visualize information flow into Fortran statements and are drawn as blue connections but do not influence the connectivity of components INFO END Indicates the end of a relation The program is waiting for a left mouse button click to set the end point of the new relation To cancel drawing a relation click the right mouse button or press the Esc key The field to the right of the mode field displays the modified status of the active circuit As soon as you alter the circuit moving a label deleting a connection inserting a new component etc the text Modified will appear indicate that the circuit needs saving before quitting ATPDraw The field will be empty when you save the circuit or undo all modifications Note that the number of available undo buffers are limited default value is 10 but can be increased from the Preferences page of the Tools Options menu to maximum 100 In the default case if more than 10 modifications are done the field will indicate a modified status until you save the circuit The rightmost field of the status bar displays the menu option hints 4 2 3 3 Comment line Shows or hides the comment line at the bottom of the active circuit window ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 62 ATPDraw for Windows DRAW version 1 0 Reference Manual 4 2 3 4 Zoom In Enlarges the objects in the active circuit window by increasi
213. nually Component LINEPI_3 x Attributes MODE PHASE NAME R11 051 05999999946 IN ABC 0001 Rz Fr 3 0399999999 GIIT ABC 0002 Ree 755 6200000001 Ral 818 41 00000001 Rad 773 8399999999 R33 851 0599999996 L11 317370000000 L21 111 6 Group No fo Label soo kiy Comment Hide M Lock OF Cancel Help Fig 5 3 Three phase pi equivalent input window The ATP file created by ATPDraw is shown below BEGIN NEW DATA case C Generated by ATPDRAW Mon 4 May 1998 C A Bonneville Power Administration program C Programmed by H K H idalen at EFI NORWAY 1994 1997 SPREFIX C ATPDRAW USP SSUFP IX LIB SDUMMY XYZOOO C Miscellaneous Data Card POWER FREQUENCY 60 00001 E 500 5 1 1 1 0 O il 0 C il 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 C 345678901234567890123456789012345678 9012345678 90123456789012345678901234567890 BRANCH C lt n 1 gt lt n 2 gt lt refl gt lt ref2 gt lt R gt lt L gt lt C gt C lt n 1 gt lt n 2 gt lt refl gt lt ref2 gt lt R gt lt A gt lt B gt lt Leng gt lt gt lt gt 0 1 Xx0001AX0002A Gol 06317 3 2 3224 2 X0001BX0002B P3404 D1 O00304 a b232 00A 004 3 X0001CX0002C Log Vle o oG LiL 60a GRas UGIL Aaaa 51x0003AX0005A poa S268 52X0003BX0005B me ea Llaga 53X000 3CX00053C x0003AX0005A L00 0 X0003BX0005B 200s 0 XO003CXO0005C 200 0 ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 115 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Advanced Manual XOO1LOA Zed O X0010B Zeol
214. object FORTRAN_3 is no longer supported This object must be replaced with 3 objects of type FORTRAN_1 If a FORTRAN _3 is found in a CIR file during conversion it is replaced by a single FORTRAN_1 object with the C phase FORTRAN string as parameter 2 7 3 Converting very old version 2 x circuit files If one still has valuable old circuit files created by ATPDraw for DOS version 2 x it is needed to convert these files to become compatible with ATPDraw for DOS version 3 x before running the CONVERT EXE A program called CIR2 3 EXE is also located on the FTP server pub atp gui atpdraw This utility converts the old CIR files to the format used by ATPDraw for DOS version 3 x The extension of the new format will be CI3 1 Make a backup copy of the old CIR files created by ATPDraw version 2 x e g type in the ATPDRAW CIR directory COPY CIR CI2 2 Copy CIR2 3 EXE to the ATPDRAW CIR directory 3 Run CIR2 3 EXE 4 Delete the old CIR files No risk you have already got backup copies in the CT2 files 5 Rename the new files to CIR extension e g REN CI3 CIR Now you can run the Windows conversion utility CONVERT as specified in the previous section In some cases the Windows CONVERT generates an error message and the conversion stops at files having been converted from the old version 2 x for DOS format To overcome this limitation load the file first into ATPDraw for DOS 3 2x then save it unmodified using the
215. odified field and menu option hints When the modified field is visible the line cable data has been changed since the previous Save or Save as operation and must be saved to disk before quitting the program ma CAATP_LCC TEST LIN OF x File Edit ATP Help Modified x 4Yeby 2 95 Fig 6 1 The main window of ATP_LCC 6 5 The File menu This field contains actions for input output of line cable constant data cases Selecting the File menu will result in a pop up menu shown in Fig 6 2 New Line New Cable Open Dae Save AS Close Exit Fig 6 2 File menu commands in ATP_LCC 6 5 1 New Line This selection starts a new line constant session ATP_LCC supports working on either a Line Constant or on a Cable Constant case When the New Line is selected a tabbed notebook style dialog box appears where the electrical and material data of conductors as well as the geometrical ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 169 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Line Cable Manual arrangement of the system can be specified The structure of the line data windows and the interpretation of input field parameters are described in section 6 9 of this manual 6 5 2 New Cable Selecting this field starts a new cable constant session ATP_LCC supports working on either a Line constant or on a cable constant case at a time Following the New Cable selection a tabbed notebook style dialog box appears where the electrical and material d
216. of the simulation in seconds End time of the simulation in seconds Inductances in mH if zero otherwise inductances in Ohm with Xopt as frequency Capacitances in mF if zero otherwise capacitances in Ohm with Copt as frequency Frequency of LUNIT6 output within the time step loop For example a value of 3 means that every third time step will be printed Frequency of saving solution points to the PL4 output file For example a value of 2 means that every second time step will be written to the PL4 file Tf 1 table of connectivity written in the LUNIT6 output file If O zero no such table written Controls steady state printout to the LUNIT6 output file Possible values are Os NO Printout 1 Print complete steady state solution Branch flows switch flows and source injection 2 Print switch flows and source injection 3 Print switch flows source injection and branch flows requested in column 80 punches If 1 extrema printed at the end of the LUNITO output file If O zero no such printout Flag for requesting an additional card for controlling the IOUT frequency If IPUN equals 1 an additional card follows not implemented Tf IPUN equals zero no such card follows Controls the dumping of EMTP memory to disk at the end of simulation if START AGAIN request is specified A value of 1 indicates memory saving START AGAIN Zero implies no memory dumping Controls saving of raw plot data
217. on hold down and drag it to a position shown in Fig 3 17 ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 40 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Introductory Manual ag be L RLE Fig 3 17 Fig 3 18 As part of the connection between the rectifier bridge and the load a small resistor is included in Fig 3 3 a The resistor is included to demonstrate the option of using a small resistor for current measurement purposes Select a resistor in the component selection menu click on the resistor with the left mouse button hold down and drag it to a desired position as shown in Fig 3 18 You must place the resistor precisely because the next step is to connect the top nodes of the diode bridge with the resistor But first give data to this resistor opening the component dialog box by a right click on the resistor Specify data values RES 0 01 Q and Current checked under Output to get current output in the subsequent ATP run Having closed the component dialog box a small 7 symbol appears on the top left side of the resistor indicating the current output request Now you can start to connect the diode bridge and the resistor together The procedure is to first click with the left mouse button on a starting node as shown in Fig 3 19 The cursor style now changes to a pointing hand and the action mode is MODE CONN END Then release the mouse button and move the mouse a rubber band is drawn from the starting point to the current cursor position
218. on the version of Windows you are using 2 2 Program installation under Windows 95 NT To install ATPDraw under Windows 95 NT perform the following operations 1 Create a temporary directory 2 Copy ad_win32 exe into that temporary directory 3 Change current directory to the newly created temporary directory 4 Run ad_win32 exe to unpack the ATPDraw for Windows 95 NT installation kit 5 Then run the program setup exe The installation process is assisted by an Install Shield Wizard The user will be requested for the directory or a folder name As the final step of installation the Wizard registers ATPDraw for Windows in the Windows registry CIR file type is also associated with ATPDraw so when you click on such a file e g in Windows Explorer ATPDraw will open it Uninstall option is also added automatically and it is available either via the Start menu Settings Control Panel Add Remove programs icon of Windows or by clicking the Uninstall icon in the ATPDraw folder If patch files were also provided on the ftp site download them and copy their contents into the appropriate ATPDraw directory When you install ATPDraw to update an older version of the program some user modified files will be overwritten To prevent this you need to make a backup of the files you have changed circuit files icon files support file library files After completing the installation and updating the atpdraw exe with the latest patch file
219. onent selection menu the new circuit object appears in the middle of the circuit window enclosed by a rectangle Click on it with the left mouse button to move or the right button to rotate finally click in the open space to unselect and place the object The object input window appears when you click the right mouse button or double click with the left button on a circuit object Assuming you have clicked on the icon of an RLC element a dialog box shown in Fig 3 2 appears Component RLC Ed Attributes Group No fo Label JRLC Comment gt ingle phase ALC branch Output C Current C Voltage Cur amp volt Power amp Energy OF Cancel Help Fig 3 2 The Component dialog box The Component dialog box has the same layout for all circuit objects In this window the user must specify the required component data The number of DATA and NODES menu fields are the only difference between input windows for standard objects The nonlinear branch components have a Characteristic page too in addition to the normal Attributes page where the nonlinear characteristics and some include file options can be specified Carriage return Tab or the mouse can be used to move the cursor between input fields The arrow keys can be used to move the cursor inside of a menu field When the cursor is moved out to the right side of the field the menu content is scrolled ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 30 ATPDraw for Windows version 1
220. ons M Show branch output Apply All W Labels Fig 4 11 View Options dialog box ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 63 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Reference Manual The View Options dialog can be used to control the visibility of the objects in the active circuit window By default all objects except node names are visible The following description explains each option in normal checked M state Components All standard and user specified components are displayed Tacs All TACS components are displayed Models All MODELS components are displayed Connections All connections short circuits are displayed Relations All relations information arrows are displayed Labels Component labels are written on the screen Node dots Node and connection end points are displayed as filled circles Node names Node names are written on screen overrides the Display attribute of nodes This option is useful after a Make Names selection in the ATP menu Drag icon The complete icon is drawn during single component moves in the unchecked state only an inverted rectangular outline is drawn No Data warning Components and node dots are drawn with a red color until the component or node has not received data No such checking is done when this option is unselected Show branch output Branch output request is included in the Component dialog box of standard components such as linear branches non linear elements switches and tra
221. pecifying data values for the model object ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 143 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Advanced Manual The default values are taken from the Use Model statements in DC68 DAT you can of course change these values individually for each use of the model The value specified in the Digit field is the number of digits used in the Use Model statement No restriction is applied to data values so Min Max is set After you have specified the values shown in Fig 5 27 click the Nodes tab and enter to the node window as shown in Fig 5 28 The name of the nodes must be the same as that used in the model file tw 11 10 Ca Mo oo Fig 5 28 Specifying node values The I O Type is a code for the type of parameter 0 output 1 current input 2 voltage input 3 switch status input 4 machine variable input The Position field is the node position on the icon border as shown at the right side of the figure The I O Type values can be changed later in the node input window menu Type for each model objects as shown in veto Fig 5 29 This window appears when the user clicks on a Type f2 Help Model node with the right mouse button M Display Fig 5 29 Input window of model nodes Model objects also must have an icon which represents the object on the screen and an optional help which describes the meaning of parameters If no user supplied help text is given the Help viewer will display
222. pt ps or Encapsulated PostScript eps file A PostScript dialog box Fig 4 6 appears which enables you to specify a name and path for the PostScript file to generate the PostScript file format Standard ps_ or Encapsulated eps and the output orientation Portrait or Landscape The PostScript file created by ATPDraw is independent of the current circuit window position and the screen resolution It is possible to print out much larger circuits than the actual circuit window The output file can later be sent to a PostScript printer or loaded into other applications i e Ghostscript Ghostview or word processors supporting the eps picture format ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 56 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 PostScript xX Save to file C atodrwn2 Exa_1 eps Browse FostScript format C Standard Ornentation Landscape C Portrait Cancel Help f Encapsulated 4 2 1 13 Print Reference Manual Fig 4 6 PostScript dialog box Sends the contents of the active circuit window to the default printer Short key Ctrl P This command is executed as a standard Windows Print dialog box and allows the user to select the current printer as well as to set up parameters for the printer 4 2 1 14 Print Setup Enables to define default printer characteristics This command will open a standard Windows Print Setup dialog box 4 2 1 15 Exit This command closes all open circu
223. pub atp ATP materials are archived in ZIP files and kept in several subdirectories as shown below onchmark Benchmark files for testing ATP capabilities canam The Can Am EMTP Users group newsletters roont Announcements of EMTP related conferences course Announcements for past and future ATP courses amp seminars gui atpdraw Graphical preprocessor interface to ATP gui atpgen Graphical preprocessor interface to ATP gui show MS Windows postprocessor old unsupported ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 23 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 gui plotxy dcase license xxxxx models tutor models appl ruleb ruleb lecruleb culeb wpnofigs culeb wpwifigs ruleb updated theobook util Installation Manual New postprocessor based on Windows GUI Sample data case files to demonstrate ATP features ATP licensing form for the xxxxx region MODELS primer by G Furst and manual by L Dube Sample MODELS intensive ATP applications Latest updated ATP Rule book chapters LEC rulebook chapters in original Lotus Manuscript format LEC rulebook chapters in WordPerfect 5 2 no figures LEC rulebook chapters in WordPerfect 5 2 with figures Updated rulebook chapters Latest updated EMTP Theory book chapters Utility programs useful to the ATP user The master ATP FIP site is mirrored by some other servers too For example in Europe you can find the ftp rrzn uni hannover de pub mirror atp mirror site at address IP
224. r Frequency check boxes in the File format page of the ATP Settings menu are selected Leaving the TACS box unchecked ATPDraw would not know that TACS is present inside the Include file so the user must have to add it manually It is also important to note that a full 5 characters long node name e g VS1XX must be used for the 3 phase node of the HVDC_6 object since ATPDraw adds A B or C to the end of the user supplied node name This restriction is required by the structure of the HVDC_6 LIB file which was prepared supposing that A B or C phase sequence identifiers are located in the 6th character position of the node names Furthermore the Old 3 phase indicator must be selected see Fig 5 16 to pass the first parameter as a 3 phase node rather than 3 single phase ones to be conform with the structure of the DBM file Consequently only the first example below is suitable to Include the HVDC_6 LIB into the ATP file properly where the node name has 5 characters and the Old 3 phase is on The other two examples are equally wrong and will generate an error message or will produce incorrect results at the simulation because in the example only 3 characters long node name has been specified or in the 3 one the Old 3 phase parameter was not selected 1 SINCLUDE HVDC_6 VS1XX POS1 XX0011 VS1XXA VS1XXC 2 SINCLUDE HVDC_6 VS1 POS1 XX0011 VS1A VS1C 3 SINCLUDE HVDC G V LXXA V LXXBE Velxxc FOSI xXxO0Ll VOIX
225. r Windows version 1 0 4 Reference Manual ATPDraw for Windows 1 0 ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 51 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Reference Manual This part of the manual outlines all menu items and program options and gives an overview of the supported ATP objects TACS components and MODELS features ATPDraw has a standard Windows user interface The Main window of the program is shown in Fig 3 1 The Main menu the Circuit window and the Component selection menu are the most important items of that window Elements of the Main menu and supported ATP components in the Component selection menu will be referenced in this part of the manual 4 1 Main window Main menu Tool bar icons Component Circuit window Map tool bar Window ij ATPDraw Iof x File Edit Yie ATP Objects Tols Window H 4 22 k ge X 5 c ojaa ea a Sa T i All cir fo Rci Se oe JE xp Ute yy TEA a aad he JEL on om LF THE K Probes amp 3 ph RLC J HINE LINE AA i m ropes pnase E HP pa Y p Branch Linear g Resistor TE RE E TT Branch Nonlinear gt Capacitor ih 60 B Line Lumped gt inductor ih Ter crt Oe Line Distributed gt BLC Se y Tr e a T iKSM Switches b RLC 3 ph f i n Us Boum pp DRLCIph KE sup ioe Machines pees i Transformers d p LO NOS TH aC L 0 G MODELS TACS User Specified b i i i i 4 AMIN ce Overhead
226. r in the Include statement ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 12 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Reference Manual 4 2 5 5 New Model The user can also create new MODELS component as explained in the Advanced Manual Selecting the New Model field will first perform the object size dialog shown in Fig 4 25 The number of nodes is now the sum of inputs and outputs of Model The maximum number of nodes is 12 and the maximum number of data passed into a Model 1s 32 Parameters on the Data control page are identical as shown in Fig 4 21 Settings on the Node control page of the New Model dialog box are given on the next Figure New Model Noname sup Name The name of the node Used to identify the node in Data Modes the Open Node and Name IO Type Position Component dialog boxes UINPUT 2 1 ig yw I O Type Type of input output to MODELS component node O Output node 1 Current input node Fig 4 26 Node control page for a Model 2 Voltage input node 37 SWitch status input 4 Machine variable input Position Node position on the icon border i OUTPUT 0 1 45 6 00 D The procedure is further the same as for new user specified objects Support files for model components are normally located in the MOD folder In addition to a support file and an icon definition each Model component also needs a text file created outside ATPDraw or using the built in Text Editor in the Tools menu This text file contains the act
227. rA 85 429 T Probes A phase eoir ciei aeie ri aeren e oe eiii a i 85 4 92 Brne i ENO a E EE EE E E E E E E E OR 87 4 2 9 3 Branch NOMA NG 5h ape ected neato es rotsncc a eacatbatC syne scienteoutelben raa aiaa ra TOTE Epa na a TAE a e ES 89 a ey Eme COn Le E EE E EE E E 91 A2 2S LeDenA EE 92 MLIN O E R R E tees 93 IPAS TE E E E E A PE E E A E AE E E E T 94 AA E INS E A A E N E E E OE EE EAE E 95 a A EVANS FOUN CTS AEE TT E A E E E 97 AD EY MODED eaa E E O E E T 98 EE TAE eaa E E E E NE 100 BAZ SCE SP CIC e E EE E 102 429 We Overhead ine PCH eccriene oniri ed nn E E EE 103 Aa O S KOR E BIN O e E E ERE E E EEE E ER 104 4 2 11 Settings in me AT PDraw ini filesinin EEE E E EEE EAAS EEEE 104 SE E M E E E EE E E T 111 5 1 Switching in 500 KV system Exa 3 CIF eninisiii dini r a E adie E Eaa 113 5 2 TACS controlled induction machine Exd_4 CI7r ccccccccccccscccccessccccessececeeeeccccuneccesesessuueeceesunseeeeaees 116 5 3 Usage of the Library and library reference objecty ExG_S CIP ccccccscsseessssseeeccceeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaaeeeeseseees 120 DA Modelong an HV DE Sa Oats sa screen esas iair a e E rE E 122 5 4 1 Creating a Data Base Module Tie iicscccicsscscvssncrdesseenansansrenetesassessasevesdsadievensbesasaussasesasatersensdianerere 122 5 4 2 Creating a new User Specified ATPDraw Object ccccssssssssssseececcccceeesesseaaaaeessseeseeeeseeees 125 IAL re UI parameter SUPPO ag aed fate etre actin E A E 125 5 4 2 2 Creating icon and help
228. rary file C_400kV LIB created this way can be found in the USP folder As the previous figure shows the model contains many identical blocks so Copy amp Paste support of ATPDraw can be exploited effectively in such kind of simulations You need to define the object parameters only once and copy them as many times as needed The power frequency voltage is assumed to be on the maximum with opposite polarity at the moment of lightning on the faulty phase So the backflashover appears when the voltage stress exceeds the flashover voltage of the voltage dependent switches simulating the insulator gaps All substation components were represented by three phase objects except the conventional arresters which were simulated by single phase nonlinear resistors with sparkover voltage since no such three phase components are available in ATPDraw The nonlinear characteristics of the device is shown in Fig 5 36 The voltage and current values are given here in kilovolts and kAmps so the amplitude of the power frequency source and the lightning current also have to be scaled accordingly ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 151 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Advanced Manual Attributes Characteristic File incluce Browse T Include characteristic OF Cancel Help Fig 5 36 Nonlinear characteristics of the SiC arrester The ATP file created by ATPDraw is printed below It must be noted that this case does run onl
229. re compatibility with other users Object type Support file SUP MODELS file MOD Include file LIB Standard Components pes UP User specified components USP USP MODELS components MOD MOD a TACS components TAC The objects support files can be edited in the Objects Edit Component menu The user can create new Models and User Specified components as explained in the Advanced Manual 4 2 5 1 New component The New component menu item is reserved for program developers To add a new component the source code needs to be modified so this feature is not available for the users 4 2 5 2 Edit Component The standard component support files in the SUP folder can be customized here Selecting the Edit Component field will first perform an open file dialog box shown in Fig 4 20 where the user ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 69 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Reference Manual can specify which support file to edit After the user has specified a file name normally by marking a file in the window and clicking Open a dialog box shown in Fig 4 21 appears Open Object Look in E Sup al Inductor sup al Linerl 33 up Linezt_9 sup Aclph sup Del phug sup Linelc_3 sup Linerl_6 sup Mov sup Ac phug sup Def sup Linelc_6 sup Lines 3 sup Mov_3 sup Ac3ph sup Diode sup Linelc_9 sup Lines 6 sup MlindS3 sup Cap _ul sup Heidler sup Linepi_1 sup Linezt_1 sup Nlinind sup Capacita sup Ir Jal
230. report is based on 1 and has been prepared by Laszlo Prikler at SYSTRAN Engineering Services Ltd in Budapest under a contract with SINTEF Energy Research For SINTEF Energy Research Hans Kr Hoidalen project manager SUMMARY ATPDraw is a graphical mouse driven preprocessor to ATP on the MS Windows platform The ATPDraw program has a standard Windows layout The user can build a graphical picture of an electric circuit by selecting components from menus The preprocessor then gives names to unspecified nodes automatically and creates the ATP file in correct format ATPDraw now supports about 70 standard components and 28 TACS objects A simplified usage of MODELS is also supported In addition the user can create his own circuit objects using the Data Base Module option in ATP Both single phase and 3 phase circuits can be constructed Several circuit windows make possible to work on more circuits simultaneously and copy information between the circuits Most types of edit facilities like copy paste rotate import export group ungroup as well as printing to paper or metafile bitmap format are available The program is written in Borland Pascal Two functionally very similar versions of ATPDraw exist a 32 bit version which is written in Borland Delphi 2 0 and runs only under Windows 95 NT and a 16 bit version compiled with Borland Delphi 1 0 for Windows 3 1x The ATPDraw package also includes the ATP_LCC program for Line Cable constants
231. resses the left mouse button unintentionally while moving the object Normally it is OK to click on Yes in this situation If you click on No the object is not placed but continues to be moveable ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 37 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Introductory Manual SuUb circuits overlap OK to proceed Fig 3 10 Overlap warning The circuit objects used in the circuit so far were drawn in red color This tells you that no data have been given to these objects You can give data to objects at any time during the building process We will now give data to the objects in the source part of the rectifier To do so simple click with the right mouse button or double click with the left button on an object When you click with the right button on the AC source icon a window shown in Fig 3 11 appears Fig 3 11 shows the window after the values for the circuit in Fig 3 3 a have been specified The names of the numerical data menus are strongly related to the names used in the ATP Rule Book 3 Attributes MODE PHASE NAME A u Group Mo fo Label Ju Comment Hide M Lock OF Cancel Help Fig 3 11 ACIPH input window The AC source has 7 input data and one node The data correspond to the required ATP data Click on HELP to load a help file This file explains the meaning of each input data and node U I 0 results in voltage source with default label U U I 1 re
232. rget properties of the new shortcut as the full path of the program including the name of the circuit file e g c atpdraw atpdraw exe mycir cir and the Start in parameter as the circuit file directory e g c atpdraw cir The same approach can be used under Windows 3 1 to create a document icon in a program group From the File New Program item dialog box specify the same parameter values as under Window 95 NT so that when you double click on the desktop icon ATPDraw launches and the circuit files are loaded into the circuit window 2 7 Converting existing CIR files A small utility called CONVERT is prepared to transform the old DOS version ATPDraw 3 x circuit and support files to the new format The program CONVERT EXE is written in Borland Delphi 1 0 so it equally runs under Windows 3 1 and 95 NT It 1s wise to make a backup of old files before attempting to convert your existing data files 2 7 1 Installation of the CONVERT utility The autorun archive CONV EXE can be downloaded from the gui atpdraw convert directory of the FTP server CONV EXE contains the program CONVERT EXE which converts the old CIRand SUP files to the new ATPDraw for Windows format To install it 1 Copy CONV EXE to the desired CONVERT directory 2 Change current dir to this directory 3 Run CONV EXE 4 Delete CONV EXE 2 7 2 How to use CONVERT Before running the utility the user 1s requested to specify 1 The Windows directo
233. rified to meet these requirements If the path of a library file specifies a different folder or the extension is not LIB an error dialog is displayed during ATP file generation enabling you to correct the erroneous specification by stripping off path and extension continue the operation using an unresolvable ATP include reference or cancel the entire ATP file generating process Name of the user specified batch job Number x specifies the location of the job in the ATP menu Max 10 are supported Name of the batch or EXE file executed by ATPDraw when the job name is selected in the ATP menu Specifies which file is sent as parameter before executing the batch job 0 No file name is sent 1 File dialog opens where the file name is selected 2 Name of the current ATP file name is sent 3 Name of the current PL4 file name is sent Both standard decimal notation and E format notation can be used when specifying real type values Legal boolean values include On Off True False 1 and 0 Default settings DeltaT 1 0H 0006 Tmax l 0E 0003 Xopt 0 Copt 0 SysFreg 50 TOut 500 IPlot 1 IDouble 1 KssOut 1 MaxOut 1 IPun 0 MemSave 0 ICat 1 Nenerg 0 ISW 1 ITEST 1 IDIST 0 IMAX 0 IDICE 1 KSTOUT 1 NSEED 0 HighResolution Off SOLLBYCard On SortByGroup Off SortByxXpos Off AutoPath Off No BatchJob is specified ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 109 ATPDraw for Windows DRAW version 1 0 Reference Manual
234. rnal commands directly from ATPDraw The new menu items specified here are inserted into the ATP menu so it will change dynamically After clicking on the New button of the dialog box shown in Fig 4 19 you are requested to specify S Edit batch jobs Iof x eS Undate Run TPPLOT Run PCPlot Run W_PCPlot o Dnw Run Plot Run LOC T Delete y Exit Name Paramete JRun ATP f None Batch file File C atpdraw Atp bat Browse Current ATP C Current PL4 ATPDraw version 1 for Windows e the Name of the job e the name and path of a Batch file or executable file e and the name of the file which is sent as Parameter The last option can be selected by radio buttons in the Parameter field If the File button is on state ATPDraw performs an open dialog box where the user can select a file name to be sent as parameter when executing the batch file Probably the most frequently used selection here is the Current ATP or Current PL4 to pass the actual file name to the batch job When you completed editing the batch job settings click on the Update button and the new commands are inserted into the ATP menu Fig 4 19 Specifying your own batch jobs 68 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Reference Manual As any other program options the previous settings can be saved to the ATPDraw ini file by using the Tools Save Options command or by selecting the Save options on exit c
235. rresponds to the one used in the benchmark file DC 68 DAT used to control three switches protecting a series capacitor circuit The actual circuit 1s shown in Fig 5 31 L CRZe CRZ CASO PCRSO is CRe25 ie i Ek Fig 5 31 DC68 DAT usage of MODELS in ATPDraw EXA_8 CIR ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 145 ATPDraw for Windows DRAW version 1 0 Advanced Manual No connections are drawn between the three models in Fig 5 31 and the nodes in the electrical network Instead the same node names are specified both in the models and in the circuit This results in a warning such as shown in Fig 5 32 when the ATP file is created but it can be ignored in this case by clicking OK If you click Abort ATPDraw marks the node names with identical name in cyan color If you wish you can use the Draw relation feature available under TACS in the component selection menu to visualize the connection between the model objects and the electrical network Q Same name on different nodes GAPA Fig 5 32 Warning message that can be ignored here The three Models must have different Use As names If you click the right mouse button on the Model controlling GAPA an input window will appear where you can specify the parameters shown in Fig 5 33 The Model file field is the name and path of the file which contains the model definition written in MODELS simulation language 4 The Use As field can contain any name but
236. rsion 1 for Windows ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Introduction 1 1 What is ATPDraw ATPDraw for Windows is a graphical mouse driven preprocessor to the ATP version of the Electromagnetic Transients Program EMTP It assists to create and edit the model of the electrical network to be simulated interactively In the program the user can construct an electric circuit by selecting predefined components from an extensive palette The preprocessor then creates the corresponding ATP input file automatically in correct format Circuit node naming is administrated by ATPDraw and the user only needs to give name to key nodes ATPDraw currently supports about 70 standard components and 28 TACS objects A simplified usage of MODELS is also possible In addition the user can create his own circuit objects using the Data Base Module and the INCLUDE option of ATP Both single phase and 3 phase circuits can be constructed Multiple circuit windows are supported to work on several circuits simultaneously and copy information between the circuits Most types of edit facilities like copy paste rotate import export group ungroup undo and print are available Other facilities in ATPDraw are a built in editor for ATP file editing support of Windows clipboard for bitmap metafile output of Windows Metafile Bitmap file format or PostScript files ATPDraw is most valuable to new users of ATP and is an excellent tool for educational purposes It
237. ry WinDir where ATPDraw for Windows is installed 2 The DOS directory DOSDir where ATPDraw for DOS is installed 3 Which file types to convert The following files will be converted depending on the selected options in the Convert checkbox Circuit This is recommended to convert After conversion the ATPDraw for Windows will be able to read the old circuit files Only CIR files stored in the DosDir CIR directory will be converted User specified objects This is recommended to convert Enables ATPDraw for Windows to read your old user specified objects Only SUP files stored in the DosDir USP directory will be converted User created LIB files must be copied to the WinDir USP directory manually Models This is recommended to convert Converts your old model components Only SUP files stored in the DosDir MOD directory will be converted MOD files must be copied to the Windir MOD directory manually ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 18 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Installation Manual Standard components Not recommended to convert new standard components are in distribution Conversion of standard components should be selected only when the user has changed the default SUP ICO or HLP files substantially Only SUP files stored in the DosDir SUP and DosDir TAC directories will be converted Be aware that ATPDraw for Windows store the SUP the ICO and the HLP files in a single file called SUP The TACS
238. s access to MODELS and TACS components ae In the TACS submenu you will find a Relation option which enables you Sources t to visualize information flow into Fortran statements KMachines Transformers User specified components and overhead lines described as PCH files menor calculated by the Line Cable Constant supporting routines of ATP can TACS be selected in the lowermost section User specified Overhead Line PCH Fig 4 37 Component selection menu 4 2 9 1 Probes amp 3 phase Probe Volt The menu Probes amp 3 phase appears when the mouse moves over this item Probe Curt in the Component selection menu or when the user hits the P character Probe Tacs splitter Transpl ABC BCA Transp AGL CAB Transp ABC CBA Transp4 46C ACB ABC Reference DEF Reference Fig 4 38 Drawing objects on the Probe amp 3 phase menu Probes are components for monitoring the voltage branch current or TACS values and are handled differently than other components you open Probe Volt p Selecting this field draws the voltage probe used to specify voltage output request in the ATP file All probe objects have an Open Probe dialog window where the user can specify the number of phases to connect to and select phases to be monitored ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 85 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Reference Manual Phases E Ta L E rec xl Fig 4 39 Open probe dialog box Probe Curr a Sel
239. s the following command when you click Run ATP ATP BAT lt Drive path current_atp_file gt ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 47 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Introductory Manual 3 8 Three phase circuits Exa_2 cir Both single phase circuits and three phase circuits are available in ATPDraw For all three phase objects the number of phases are indicated in the selection menu The three phase objects also have a 3D layout in the circuit window and the icon consists of thick lines from the nodes into the object symbol All three phase nodes have only 5 characters available in the input windows ATPDraw adds the extension A B and C at the end of the node name By default the phase sequence is ABC the first data card uses A the second B and the last C The only way to change the phase sequence is to use the available transposition objects TRANSP1 TRANSP4 selectable under Probes amp 3 phase in the component selection menu The current phase sequence is displayed in the bottom of the node input window after an ATP Make File or ATP Make Names selection has been made The following example illustrates the usage of three phase objects Coupled Coupled 51 53 Fig 3 32 b Equivalent ATPDraw circuit EXA_2 CIR The circuit shown in Fig 3 32 was built up in the same way as your first circuit You can note that connections between the three phase nodes appear to be thick The circuit contains 2 special obj
240. same name before attempting to convert it to ATPDraw for Windows format 2 8 How to get help ATPDraw offers a standard Windows help file system This file provides help on all windows and menus in ATPDraw and assists in building up a circuit Several links between help pages and a relatively large index register for searching text or phrases are also available A Help button is attached to all circuit objects which shows a brief overview of the meaning of each parameter Modification and extension of these help files with users own remarks are also possible using the built in Help Editor in the Tools menu 2 8 1 Help via the Internet Licensed users of the ATP may subscribe to an e mail users group where users share news provide help to each other and have better access to the program developers This server is free and is very easy to subscribe to For more details you are advised to read section 2 10 of this manual ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 19 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Installation Manual 2 8 2 Help from the author of ATPDraw The author of the program is also available for questions from ATPDraw users but cannot be made responsible for any problem that they may experince The address of the author of ATPDraw is Dr Hans Kr H idalen SINTEF Energy Research 7034 Trondheim NORWAY http www energy sintef no E mail hans hoidalen energy sintef no Fax 47 73597250 Phone 47 73597200 The ATP
241. se NGRND must be O0 not tested Yes Similar to the No cross bonding case by each major section is split in three parts with actual transposition of the sheaths NPAIS Number of major PI sections IRSEP Deactivated for homogeneous modeling IRSEP 0 Sheaths and armors short circuited each major section IRSEP lt gt 0 Sheaths and armors are kept separated XMAJOR Length of each major section m RSG Sheath grounding resistance ohm at the interconnection of two major cable sections Typical value 1 10 ohm CNAME One character to distinguish cable sections J Marti when selelected JMarti line model will be generated Freqss Frequency at which the steady state values should be calculated Fregqinit Initial frequency of the logarithmic frequency looping Dist Length of the cable system Default fitting Recommended for inexperienced users No default J Marti fitting see under the Fig 6 21 Cable data tab Cable data Cable number iE Copy Paste Core data Ri m Re m Ra m RhoCfohmm mug mult epslil Sheath data R4 m R5 m RhoS ohmm mus mul2 epsl2 F Sheath r Grounded Armor data R6 m R m RhoAfohmm muA mula epsl3 F Armor a F Grounded Position Yert m Horiz m l bs Fig 6 25 Cable data settings This tab has a Copy and a Paste button too The data of the current cable can be copied to an internal clipboard using the Copy button The Paste button copies the data from the clipboard
242. stem drawn in the middle of the main window will be copied to the Windows clipboard Thus the drawing in the main window can be pasted easily into other Windows application The toolbar icon also performs this operation 6 7 The ATP menu The pull down ATP menu has only two items Create data case and Edit data case 6 7 1 Create data case Generates an ATP input file in correct format for the actual line or cable constant data case The name of the disk file will be requested in a standard Save As dialog box The default filename is the same as that of the current line or cable data file completed with the extension atp When the ATP file is successfully created it will be reported to the user in a message box such as shown in Fig 6 6 Information x G OKI File is saved as C ATP_LCCV TEST ATP Fig 6 6 The ATP file is successfully generated 6 7 2 Edit data case This selection opens the Notepad editor which enables you to contemplate or edit the ATP file When the Edit data case is selected a file having the same name as the active line or cable data file with the extension atp is searched for and automatically opened as shown in Fig 6 7 ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 172 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Line Cable Manual Test atp Notepad Me x File Edit Search Help BEGIN NEW DATA CASE LINE CONSTANTS METRIC 231 0522 231 0522 231 0522 231 0522 231 0522 231 0522 36 i
243. sults in a current source with label I Specify the data as shown in Fig 3 11 The node names should normally not be specified in this window Click OK to close the window and update the object values Click on Cancel to just quit the window ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 38 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Introductory Manual After you have given data to the AC source and closed the window note how the object layout changes when you exit the window proceed to the other objects Repeat the procedure explained above to give data to the resistor and to the inductor by calling the Component dialog box of the objects To do so click with the right mouse button on the resistor and inductor icon respectively The probe objects have different input window than other objects To open the voltage or current probe input window click on its icon with the right mouse button In this window you can select the Phases W number of phases of the probe and which phases to monitor In this single phase example default values no of phases 1 vE monitored phase A of both voltage and current probes should be 5 selected as shown in Fig 3 12 _ Fig 3 12 Open probe dialog box 3 7 1 3 Diode bridge In this process you will learn to use some editing options like rotate group duplicate and paste Since the diode bridge consists of four equal branches you do not need to build all of them from scratch First you select a diode
244. switching operations including commutation of valves Calculation of the frequency response of phasor networks is also supported ATP includes at present consists of the following components 3 e Uncoupled and coupled linear lumped elements e Transmission lines and cables with distributed and frequency dependent parameters Elements with nonlinearities transformers including saturation and hysteresis surge arresters arcs Ordinary switches time dependent and voltage dependent switches statistical switching Valves diodes and thyristors 3 phase synchronous machines universal machines MODELS and TACS Transient Analysis of Control Systems MODELS in ATP is a general purpose description language supported by an extensive set of simulation tools for the representation and study of time variant systems MODELS allows the description of arbitrary user defined control and circuit components providing a simple interface for connecting other programs models to ATP As a general purpose programmable tool MODELS can be used for processing simulation results either in the frequency domain or in the time domain The following supporting routines are available in ATP e LINE CONSTANTS CABLE CONSTANTS and CABLE PARAMETERS for calculation of electrical parameters of overhead lines and cables e Generation of frequency dependent line model input data JMARTI Setup SEMLYEN Setup and NODA Setup e Calculation of model data for transformers
245. t gt C HYSTERESIS C SERASE C CG Z2TYPE LEVEL Request Armco M4 oriented silicon steel only 1 availab C 1 4 That was ITYPE 1 As for LEVEL 2 moderate accuracy outp C 06 az Od ee Current and flux coordinates of positive saturat S CeZ20U0URTOL 9 49129412R70 2 450 0000UE TOL 9s434 11 7oSsbroL 104 7 3000EfF0L 2 22400000EF OL 4 9 L00000 0 EF0U 9 03 3062352701 s 04L L23000 E F00 8 86235294E 01 Ce Lo Ta0000B 0L e 51 9294 2 OL 2 AB ClZO0URTOO Sos LLIDO LZ EFUL 3 55975000E 00 7 43294118E 01 4 290250008 00 6 28941176E 01 4 91000000E 00 4 57411765E 01 Q0 L13 T30000EF00 3 050941 eb 0L 6 TOLZ9000EF00 42423105602E701 S 07Z5S0000R T00 5 71764 706E 01 1 10475000E 01 6 86117647E 01 Lesot 2 SOUR POL 1 459294 CE OL 1 74918750E 01 8 00470588E 01 ZA O9362500ETOL 6 51929412R 01 S22SSoOZOUETOL 6 91952 94 LEO Ac APCOASO00R TOL 9 205411 76870 O L3750000ETOL 9 491294 2E701 9 8Z000000FR OL 8 7Z2Z000000E 01 te35025000EF02 9 77717647E 01 e274 In spite of the Type 96 inductor is not a native object of ATPDraw it can be included by a special use of the Type 93 nonlinear inductor object Since ATPDraw supports to include an external file such as the hysteresis loop specified in the HYSTR400 LI1B the nonlinear flux current characteristics for the Type 96 elements can be connected to a standard Type 93 object too When the ATP has been created in the ATP Make File procedure the user must change the Type
246. t of a support file The default help editor view font can be changed by selecting the Font option in the Character menu A detailed description of available options can be found in the next chapter 4 2 6 3 Text Editor Calls a text editor where user can create or edit standard text files By default the built in text editor see Fig 4 13 is displayed but you can specify any text editor programs to use on the Preferences page of the Tools Options dialog box To open the editor select the Text Editor option in the Tools menu or the Edit File option in the ATP menu In the latter case a file with extension atp and the same name as the name of the active circuit file is searched for and automatically loaded if it is found When invoked from the Tools menu the text buffer will initially be empty The main menu of the help editor viewer or built in text editor contains a File menu an Edit menu and a Character menu In addition a Done option appears to the right of the Character menu if the editor is opened from the Edit Component dialog box By selecting Done changes made to the help text will be accepted A description of all the available options are described next File options New Opens an empty text buffer Built in text editor only Open Loads the help text of a support file or the contents of a text file into the text buffer Save Stores the contents of the text buffer to disk Save As Stores the contents of the text buf
247. t windows right click on a TACS node All TACS nodes are assumed to be single phase 4 2 6 Tools Items in the Tools menu enable you to edit component icons or help view or mon Enion edit text files and save or customize several program options Fig 4 27 shows Be Peale the available commands in the Tools menu Text Editor Options Save Options Fig 4 27 Tools menu 4 2 6 1 Icon Editor Brings up an icon editor shown in Fig 4 28 where the user can edit the components icon It can be invoked either from the Edit Component dialog box or by selecting the Icon Editor option in the Tools menu In either case you can create or edit the component icon of a support file amp Icon Editor Ric sup MES Edit Tools Open Ctrl o Dee Ctrl S Depending on how the editor was invoked the file menu provides different options When opened from the Objects menu Edit Component Edit User Specified Edit Model Edit TACS you can only import icons from other support files or cancel the edit operation and close the editor window In this case the Done option in the main menu is used to accept and store the modified icon as shown on Fig 4 23 Ctrl l When opened from the Tools menu additional options to load from and save to disk appear in the File menu Fig 4 28 Icon Editor menus At the bottom of the editor window there is a color palette with two boxes indicating the current color selection and a real size
248. tat F Ifta T InElim I IfPlot Fig 6 28 Line Model window for the case JMARTI_1 LIN Ph no Skin Resis _ IX___ React__ Diam _ Horiz _ Vtower _ Vmid fohmimiley finch rty ft dt 1 1 2 2 d d 0 0 0 3636 0 3636 0 3636 0 3636 0 3636 0 3636 0 5 0 5 ee aall co co cc cc co S amp S 20 75 19 25 0 75 0 75 19 25 20 75 12 9 12 9 Fig 6 29 Conductor card window for the case JMARTI_1 LIN ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 190 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Line Cable Manual 6 11 2 JMarti model of a 750 kV line The line models calculated here are applied in the example case Exa_ a cir of the Advanced Manual The LCC supporting program has been used again to create a JMarti model of a 750 kV transmission line with total length of 487 km Transpositions separate this line into four sections so the LCC input files ready to be loaded for this example are called LIN750_x LIN where x runs from 1 4 The line configuration is shown in Fig 6 30 13 2 m At tower 41 05 m Midspan 26 15 m lt Separ 60 cm 17 5 m n At tower 27 9 m Alpha 45 Midspan 13 0 m NB 4 y y Uj Fig 6 30 Tower configuration of the 750 kV line All parameters are given in Metric units and the automatic bundling option of ATP is used in this example Each phase has four conductors in rectangular arrangement The cunductors are assumed to be tubular wit
249. ter MS Windows 95 NT 3 51 or later XGA screen 1024x768 resolution is suggested 16 MB memory available 32 MB under NT 10 MB free hard disk space 2 5 Hardware requirements under Windows 3 x IBM compatible PC 486 DX4 100 or faster MS Windows 3 x or later VGA screen 8 MB memory available 10 MB free hard disk space 2 6 Configuring ATPDraw An initialization file At pdraw ini contains customizable program options Generally default settings meet most of the user s requirements When it is required the Atpdraw ini can either be modified via Tools Options menu of the program or by using a text editor Default values and supported options are described in the Reference part of this manual 2 6 1 ATPDraw command line options On the command line one or more circuit files can be specified to be opened when the program starts In the example below the circuit files mylst cir and my2nd cir will be loaded at startup and displayed in separate circuit windows These files must exist in the directories indicated C ATPDRAW gt atpdraw c atpdraw cir mylst cir c cir my2nd cir ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 17 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Installation Manual In Windows 95 or NT 4 0 you can use this property to create shortcuts to the circuit files on your desktop For instance Click the right mouse button on an empty space of the desktop and select New Shortcut then browse and select ATPDraw exe Specify the Ta
250. tes later the list server program replies with a confirmation letter to the address found in the From filed of the requester s message It means that subscription is allowed and accepted only if one subscribes from his own account After subscription any messages you send to the address ATP EMTP listserv nodak edu ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 22 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Installation Manual will be forwarded to others subscribed to this list The listserver was set up to support information exchange between ATP users to provide a facility to help each other and to have better access to program developers The list is unmoderated but a set of common sense rules has to be applied The traffic of the ATP EMTP mailing list is automatically archived by the LISTSERV program on monthly basis Past mailings are logged into separate disk files LOGyymm where yy and mm are the year and month respectively These files are available via the GET command of the listserver If one sends a message to the address listserv listserv nodak edu containing a single line in the body e g GET ATP EMTP LOG 9703 after a while the listserver responds with a message and the requested file mails delivered during March 1997 will be sent to the requester s e mail account The most important listserver commands are SIGNOFF ATP EMTP Cancel the subscription REView ATP EMTP Return e mail addresses of all subscribers SET ATP EMTP op
251. the executable disk file of the corresponding application When you click the Update button the name of the new batch job will be added to the existing ATP menu items 2 10 ATP related Internet resources 2 10 1 Electronic mail Electronic mail is the most known feature of the Internet By this way anyone who has an account on a computer connected to the Internet can send messages to other users For ATP users this service provides an easy efficient and very fast way of communication with other users all over the World including program developers regional user group representatives or the author of ATPDraw The ATP EMTP listserver is an E mail remailer program which rebroadcasts incoming messages to all members having been subscribed to the list It was set up in 1991 by Prof Bruce Mork at the North Dakota State University USA Six years later the list had more than 600 subscribers The list 1s actually maintained by its members who add themselves delete themselves and correct their own listing parameters name affiliation country Anyone who got an ATP license has right to subscribe to the ATP EMTP Listserver For subscription one has to send a single line email to the following address listserv listserv nodak edu The subject of the message can be left blank The body of the text 1s shown next SUB ATP EMTP Your Full Name Institution Country Name affiliation and country fields are limited to 39 characters total Some minu
252. the ATP Rule Book 3 In this example the otherwise powerful manual bundling option is not used so all conductors are specified separately The automatic bundling is described next in section 6 11 2 The ATP input file is generated when you select the ATP Create data case command For the JMARTI_1 LIN case this file is shown next Processing it with ATP the resulting punched output PCH can be used as input for the ATPDraw s Overhead Line PCH objects BEGIN NEW DATA CASE JMARTI SETUP SERASE LINE CONSTANTS ENGLISH 1 364 05215 4 LeG02 204 75 DOs g 1 364 05215 4 ie GO02 u 9U g A dot 05215 4 1 602 e a Ti CL 2 304 05215 4 1 602 ala T ee ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 189 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Line Cable Manual BLANK CARD ENDING CONDUCTOR CARDS 3 364 05215 4 3 364 05215 4 O eo 20L 4 0 e 261 4 TOU 5000 TOU 60 LO a mae ail BLANK CARD ENDING FREQUENCY CARDS BLANK CARD ENDING LINE CONSTANT O 0 SPUNCH BLANK JMARTI BEGIN NEW DATA CASE BLANK CARD J Marti Rho ohmm Dist mile Freq SS Hz Freq init Hz fC NexMis NorMax Al NexMis NorMax 0 zd sd Freq Hz 3000 I0 SOs ad 50s Jasa Jasa 9645 96 0 138 1 1 138 1 1 138 1 9 10 1 0 1 1 0 l English unit M High accuracy FCAR F Seg ground DEC p Transposed PNT Real matrix TR l Default Fitting T leCode T tat F Ifta T InElim I IfPlot l leCode T
253. the File Open command or Ctrl O and select the file name in the Open Circuit dialog box The resulting ATP files will be given at the end of each description The second part of the manual explains the possibility of creating new circuit objects in ATPDraw This extension is possible due to the ATP facilities INCLUDE DATA BASE MODULARIZATION and MODELS 5 1 Switching in 500 kV system Exa_3 cir This example shows how to perform a switching analysis in a simplified network The line model used is a I equivalent line calculated for 5000 Hz by LINE CONSTANTS outside of ATPDraw How to create a more accurate JMarti line model and how to use the ATP_LCC the new interactive graphical preprocessor for LINE CABLE CONSTANTS support are shown in section 5 5 of this manual and in the Line Cable Manual The example circuit is shown on Fig 5 1 a the equivalent ATPDraw circuit in Fig 5 1 b Fig 5 1 a Switching example circuit Wave inp Fig 5 1 b Example circuit 3 Line switching EXA_3 CIR Source The source is a 500 kV three phase AC source The amplitude of the voltage source U I 0 is 2 Amp soo 22 kV V3 The input menu for the source 1s shown in Fig 5 2 ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 113 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Advanced Manual Attributes MODE PHASE NAME aca oos Tstart Tstop Group No fo Label Ju Comment Hide M Lock OF Cancel Help
254. the branch output requests If the Hide box is selected the object becomes hidden which means that it is not written to the ATP file and its icon becomes light gray in the circuit window The Lock option is not yet implemented in the present version of the program The OK button will close the dialog box and the object s data and its properties are updated in the data structure The red drawing color which indicates that no data is given to the object will be turned off When you click on the Cancel button the window will be closed without updating the object s data The Help button invokes the Help Viewer showing the help text of the object For obtaining further help press the F7 key 3 4 Operating the mouse This chapter contains a summary of the various actions taken dependent on mouse operations The left mouse button is generally used for selecting objects or connecting nodes the right mouse button is used for specification of object or node properties Left simple click On object Selects object also connection If the Shift key is pressed the object is added to the current group On object node Begins to draw a connection Moves the mouse to the end node left click to place right to cancel In the open area of the circuit window Unselects object Right simple click On object node ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 31 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Introductory Manual Opens the node dialog box On unselect
255. the model definition file MOD automatically so it is advised to use this feature If you really need your own help file click the button at the right hand side of the New Model dialog box to open the help editor The icon editor appears similarly by clicking the button Here you can be creative and draw a suitable icon as shown in Fig 5 30 When you finished select the Done menu item Finally when you click the Save or Save As buttons the support file of the new model object will be saved to disk A file window appears where you must specify the name of the object The object does not need to have the same name as the model file The object should have the extension SUP and be stored in the MOD folder You can reload and modify the support file of the model objects whenever you like using the Edit Model item in the Objects menu The new model object has now been created and it is ready for use It can be found in the component selection menu under the MODELS field After you have selected this field a file window appears where you can select the file FLASH_1 SUP This will draw the Model and it can be edited like any other ATPDraw objects ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 144 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Advanced Manual Es Icon Editor _ oO x File Edit Tools Done Fig 5 30 The icon of the new model object 5 6 3 Using MODELS controlled switches DC68 DAT Exa_8 cir The Model created in chapter 5 6 2 co
256. the name must be different for all the three Models in Fig 5 31 MODEL FLASH_1 x Attributes MODE PHASE NAME WI 0 CR30A 2 o CR20A Iczn 0 CRZ 2A trip i GAFA Group Mo fo Label Comment Models Model file MOD FLASH_1 MOD Browse Use As ASHA ORK Cancel Help Fig 5 33 Attributes of Model objects If you right click on one of the arresters an input window appears where you can specify the parameters In section 4 2 9 3 of the Reference Manual the usage of the Attributes and Characteristic page of ZnO arresters are explained in detail so it 1s not repeated here ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 146 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Advanced Manual The characteristics of ZnO arresters can not be specified directly by exponential functions in ATPDraw since ATPDraw uses the current voltage characteristics and performs an exponential fitting internally However the nonlinear characteristics can be taken into account using Include This requires a text file named e g ZNO_1 LIB stored in the USP directory in the following format LQ 40 T choke kee The Jnclude field on the Characteristic page must contain the name of this file and the Include characteristic button must be on in such cases If you choose the Browse button a file window will appear where you can select a file for the characteristic You must be careful with using SUFFIX and PREFIX options when the f
257. the new program group is created with the specified name Select File New again but now leave the Program Item radio button to be selected then press OK and Browse the ATP_LCC EXE in the appearing window Finally press OK and the new icon must appear in the specified program group Windows 95 NT4 0 Select Settings Taskbar option from the Start menu Choose Add on the Start Menu Programs page and Browse the ATP_LCC EXE Select a folder in which you are going to place the ATP_LCC shortcut or create a new folder by clicking the New Folder button Finally press Finish and OK The new icon must appear in the Programs folder of the Start menu ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 168 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Line Cable Manual 6 4 The Main window and the Main menu ATP_LCC has a standard Windows user interface Fig 6 1 shows the main window of the program The Main menu of the program has four sub menus File Edit ATP and Help The Toolbar below the main menu provides easy access to the most frequently used file Open Save Edit and bitmap Zoom to fit Copy to clipboard operations In the middle of the main window the specified line and cable geometry is drawn In that window zooming is supported by the Zoom to fit toolbar icon or by the Zoom fit command in the Edit menu Zooming is also supported by a left or right mouse click on the desired position of the diagram At the bottom of the main window a status bar is located with M
258. three alternatives for input format are supported e Flux current 1 if the flag RMS in the input window is equal to 0 Ums lms f the flag RMS in the input window is equal to 1 e Include parameters with Include If RMS 1 ATPDraw calculates the flux current values used in the ATP file automatically 4 2 9 10 MODELS Besides the standard components the user can create his own models using the MODELS simulation language in ATP Using this feature requires knowledge about the syntax and general structure of MODELS language The process normally consists of two steps 1 To create a new support file SUP using the New Model command in the Objects menu 2 To create a model file MOD containing the actual model description The Advanced part of this manual gives more information about the use of Models objects in ATPDraw and about the procedure to create a new one Selecting MODELS in the component selection menu performs an Open Model dialog box where the user can choose a model file name The Component dialog box of any Models objects has a new input section Models besides the specification of DATA values and the name of the NODES as shown in Fig 4 50 This new section has two input fields Model file for locating the model description file and and a Use As field for specification of the model_name in the USE model AS model_name statement of MODELS in ATP 4 ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 98 ATPDraw for Windows
259. tions Update your subscription options INDex ATP EMTP Send the list of available archive files 2 10 2 The ATP FTP servers FTP is the method by which users can download or upload files from machines connected to the Internet The anonymous FTP or aFTP permits a user to log on to a remote computer and access files others have stored in a public directory If the files are not publicly available a password is required to have access to files owned by someone else By using this service ATP licensed users can download ATP related files from a remote computer to their personal computer or workstation Many ATP related material excepting the source code and the ATP program itself is available over the Internet via FTP A limited part of this information is accessible via aFTP ATP license forms newsletters upcoming conference seminar information and the ATPDraw program To access these files one has to login as anonymous and to give his personal e mail address as the password The majority of ATP related directories are password protected e g the latest revisions of ATP Rule Book pages utility programs sample data cases etc If you do not know that password contact your regional user group representative the person who signed your ATP license agreement The address of the master FTP site at the Michigan Technological University Anonymous ATP FTP site ftp ftp ee mtu edu pub atp Secure ATP FTP directories ftp atp ftp ee mtu edu
260. ual Model description By default you can store these files also in the MOD folder The names on the Models Data and Nodes pages must be equal to the names used in the actual Model file The I O Type parameter can be changed later in the Model node input window right click on the object s node All model nodes are assumed to be single phase 4 2 5 6 Edit Model A model object can be edited like any other circuit object If the user chooses Edit Model the well known Open Object dialog appears where a model support file can be selected Then a data control window enables the user to customize data and node values icon and help text of a model component 4 2 5 7 Edit TACS A TACS object can be edited like a Model object Edit TACS menu item enables the user to customize a standard TACS component in the TAC folder A TACS object will use exactly the same control pages as a Model object Settings on the Node and Data control pages are similar to that of the Models objects except I O Type field which is a code for the type of TACS node I O Type Type of input output to TACS component node d Output node Le Positive input 2 Negative input oF Disconnected input A node will also be taken as ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 13 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Reference Manual disconnected if it has no visual connections in the circuit drawing and has no user specified node name This I O Type can be changed in TACS node inpu
261. uit or under the Tools Options View ATP Edit settings for all new circuits created henceforth Fig 3 30 shows an example of the ATP s 1 miscellaneous data card settings specifying time step time scale of the simulation etc This window appears if you select the Simulation tab of the ATP Settings menu ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 45 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Introductory Manual ATP Settings x Select Simulation Integer Switch File format e Time step AT in sec e End time of simulation Tmax in sec delta T 6 0E 0005 e Xopt 0 Inductance in mH Tmax 6 0E 0002 e Copt 0 Capacitance in uF opt fo Copt fo Press Help to get more information or OK to close the dialog box The simulation settings are stored in the circuit file so you should save the file after changing these settings Fig 3 30 Simulation settings The first integer miscellaneous data card is changed under the ATP Settings Integer page and the statistic systematic switch control card is specified under the ATP Settings Switch settings Under the File format page the user can Simulation Integer Switch File format select precision mode and the ATP file sorting criteria The main characteristic of High resolution the simulation time domain or frequency M Sorting by cards scan can also be set on this page If you Sorting by group number select the File format page the window I Sarting by xpos
262. w single icon pixels or lines or shapes by pressing and holding down the left or right mouse button while you move the mouse FiA Selects the flood fill tool Fills any shape with the current color 4 2 6 2 Help Editor Displays a help editor where the current help text assigned to components can be modified The Help Editor or viewer is actually the same window as the built in Text Editor but with different menu options and capabilities When used as a viewer of component help no editing is allowed and the File menu provides printing options only Consequently the Find amp Replace option of the Edit menu is not available ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 15 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Reference Manual The Word Wrap option of the Character menu can be used to toggle the insertion of extra line breaks at the right margin so that the text fits in the window To edit the help file you must either select the Help Editor in the Tools menu or the Help Editor speed button in the Edit Component Edit User Specified Edit Model Edit TACS dialog boxes In the latter case s a Done option appears in the main menu and the File menu provides printing options and a Cancel choice By selecting Done you accept any changes made to the help text When the editor is invoked from the Jools menu the File menu will contain an Open and a Save option The text buffer is initially empty so one has to select File Open in order to load the help tex
263. will draw the object LIBREF_3 This object is a dummy object REF that is not written to the ATP file Its purpose is just to visualize a connection inside a e g LIB object The object is three phase one Files Besides the standard components the user can create his own User Specified Objects The usage of this feature requires knowledge about the Data Base Modularization in ATP The process normally consists of two steps 1 Creating a new support file SUP using the New User Specified command in the Objects menu 2 Creating a Data Base Module punch file LIB containing the object description The Advanced part of this manual gives more information about the user specified objects in ATPDraw and about the procedure to create a new one Selecting Files in the component selection menu an Open Component dialog appears where the support files of the user specified objects in the USP directory are listed If you select a SUP file from the list and click Open the icon of the object will be displayed in the middle of the active circuit window This way any existing components even the standard components in the SUP directory can be loaded into the circuit 4 2 9 13 Overhead line PCH A completely separate program called ATP_LCC has been developed for line cable constant support In this program the user can specify the cross section and material data for an overhead line or a cable Based on this data the corresponding ATP fi
264. xes as show in Fig 5 18 Information x Information x File type JMlarti Library data successfully written to Number of phases 3 Coa TPORAW LSPs Imari i LIE Cancel Cancel Fig 5 18 Punch file interpretation Finally ATPDraw selects a support file from the pre defined alternatives based on the number of phases and the type of the line constant parameter or frequency dependent and displays the new line object icon in the middle of the circuit window In this example the number of phases is 3 and a frequency dependent JMarti line is described in the punch file so the icon shown left will be chosen The structure of the ATPDraw created library file JMARTI_1 LIB is identical with that of the DBM punch files produced by DATA BASE MODULE supporting routine of ATP see next KARD 2 33 33 3 KARG 1 KBEG 3 KEND 8 1 1 H 5 e Aa OAD e o w u w e Aa WOUW CO w w e A OOA KTEX BRANC 1IN_ AOUT__A 2 0 00 a 24 4 7483546645741773800E 02 134 ATPDraw version 1 for Windows ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Advanced Manual Le01937 91242139141Et02 Ledo 03 LA 3030992 ook TU 1 92 7 18142213451842E 02 9849746029531441 6390R 03 OlZ IZA O1LO9C5 942 ZEtO4 al I0 LO L0Z29L30ZA0SET0A 97786715004263443E 02 38025450 799959904 7eE 02Z SUG9LOOTOLO TT 1465 TETU 1 40565095310774655E 03 376378283360455205E 04 Veo 21340786193 73520E 04 NM WR WN DEEE Same as in the file JMARTI_1
265. y if you increase the DEAFULT parameter in the LISTSIZE DAT file of ATP from 3 0 to 6 0 BEGIN NEW DATA CASE C Generated by ATPDRAW Tue 30 Jun 1998 C A Bonneville Power Administration program C Programmed by H K H idalen at EFI NORWAY 1994 1997 SPREFIX C ATPDRAW USP SSUPF IX LIB SDUMMY XYZ000 C Miscellaneous Data Card C dr gt x Tmax gt lt Xopt gt lt Copt gt 2 000E 8 00003 500 3 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890 BRANCH C lt n 1 gt lt n 2 gt xrefl gt lt ref2 gt lt R gt lt L 2 lt C gt C lt n 1 gt lt n 2 gt lt refl gt lt ref2 gt lt R gt lt A gt lt B gt lt Leng gt lt gt lt gt 0 1XX0014XX0010 UL 200 2 30E8 Gw d 1XxX0016XX0014 WL 00ra I0E8 Te d 1XX0018XX0016 WL 20022 30E Loes A xX0021 40 0 XX0023 02 00 2 90E8 400 1 XX0021 Loe 003 O XX0028XX001Z WL 20022 0E Ge aL 1XX0030XX0028 0L 20022 50Re Te d 1XX0032XX0030 UL 2002225080 Los A XX0035 40 0 1X0038AX0039A UZ 650 2 40E9 S000 1 G0 42 X00 SCE X0U0GTR sO02 AOU URS 3000 1 00 IrU0 SC CKO003IC XX0035 Lors s0053 0 1XxX0046 U2 S00s2 90BS 400 1 1XX0060XX0045 Oh 200 2 OR 8 1 ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 152 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Advanced Manual 1XxX0068XX0060 01 200 272 5086 7 1 1XX0070XX0068 01 200 2 50E8 18 1 xx0070 40 0 1XX0081XxX0055 01 200 272 5082 8 1 1XX
266. y Manual starts with the explanation of how to operate windows and mouse in ATPDraw The manual shows how to build a circuit step by step starting from scratch Then special considerations concerning three phase circuits are outlined 3 1 Operating Windows ATPDraw has a standard Windows user interface This chapter explains some of the basic functionalities of the Main menu and the Component selection menu and two important windows the Main window and the Component dialog box 3 2 The Main window Main menu Tool bar icons Component Windows tool bar standard buttons E ATPDraw Biel x File Edity iew ATP Objefts Tools Yindow Help oaa e ele he Ba el el e el Ql Sy m Exa 1 cir l x Circuit eae P j L name i je i A qu 7 l j i i myfirst cir Sel x Circuit Probes amp 3 phase z windows lt Branch Linear Resistor Branc Tal m Scroll 4 Branch Nonlinear Capacitor bars Bera Line Lumped Inductor calla ae Line Distributed Circuit Switches RLC 3 ph comments RLC 3x3 ph a 2E D RLC 3 ph KMachines E SuM ranstormers L 0 Current MOLELE m action h TACS i mode This is my first ATPDRAW circuit m E _ _ _ _ O rr specified Overhead Line FCH MODE EDIT Modified Status bar with Component menu option hints selection menu Fig 3 1 The Main window Multiple Circuit windows and the floating Selection menu The ATPDraw
267. ze and position of the main window and position The next time ATPDraw is started it will be displayed with the same size and in the same position as the previous instance Save window s Records the current main window state maximized or current state normalized The next time ATPDraw is started it will be displayed in the same state Save toolbar Records the current view state visible or hidden of the state main window toolbar so it can be redisplayed in the same state next time ATPDraw is started Save status bar Records the current view state visible or hidden of the state main window status bar so it can be redisplayed in the same state next time ATPDraw is started Save comment Records the current view state visible or hidden of the state Circuit window comment line so it can be redisplayed in the Same state next time ATPDraw is started Windows 3 1 Causes the Open Save dialogs to be drawn in the Windows 3 1 style style Save options Causes program options to be automatically saved to the on exit initialization file when the program is terminated Note that the save state options will have no effect unless program options are saved to the initialization file ATPDraw ini by the Save command at the bottom of the ATPDraw Options dialog by the Save options on exit option or by the Tools Save Options menu ATPDraw version 1 for Windows 18 ATPDraw for Windows version 1 0 Reference Manual

ATPDraw - Electrical & Computer Engineering

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

ATPDraw - Electrical &amp; Computer Engineering

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

ATPDraw - Electrical & Computer Engineering